fomc transcripts · April 26, 2011
FOMC Meeting Transcript
April 26–27, 2011
1 of 244
Meeting of the Federal Open Market Committee on
April 26–27, 2011
A joint meeting of the Federal Open Market Committee and the Board of Governors of
the Federal Reserve System was held in the offices of the Board of Governors in Washington,
D.C., starting at 10:30 a.m. on Tuesday, April 26, 2011, and continuing at 8:30 a.m. on
Wednesday, April 27, 2011. Those present were the following:
Ben Bernanke, Chairman
William C. Dudley, Vice Chairman
Elizabeth Duke
Charles L. Evans
Richard W. Fisher
Narayana Kocherlakota
Charles I. Plosser
Sarah Bloom Raskin
Daniel K. Tarullo
Janet L. Yellen
Christine Cumming, Jeffrey M. Lacker, Dennis P. Lockhart, Sandra Pianalto, and John C.
Williams, Alternate Members of the Federal Open Market Committee
James Bullard, Thomas M. Hoenig, and Eric Rosengren, Presidents of the Federal
Reserve Banks of St. Louis, Kansas City, and Boston, respectively
William B. English, Secretary and Economist
Deborah J. Danker, Deputy Secretary
Matthew M. Luecke, Assistant Secretary
David W. Skidmore, Assistant Secretary
Michelle A. Smith, Assistant Secretary
Scott G. Alvarez, General Counsel
Thomas C. Baxter, Deputy General Counsel
Nathan Sheets, Economist
David J. Stockton, Economist
James A. Clouse, Thomas A. Connors, Steven B. Kamin, Loretta J. Mester, David
Reifschneider, Harvey Rosenblum, David W. Wilcox, and Kei-Mu Yi, Associate
Economists
Brian Sack, Manager, System Open Market Account
Jennifer J. Johnson, Secretary of the Board, Office of the Secretary, Board of Governors
Patrick M. Parkinson, Director, Division of Banking Supervision and Regulation, Board
of Governors
April 26–27, 2011
2 of 244
Nellie Liang, Director, Office of Financial Stability Policy and Research, Board of
Governors
Robert deV. Frierson, Deputy Secretary, Office of the Secretary, Board of Governors
William Nelson, Deputy Director, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of Governors
Linda Robertson, Assistant to the Board, Office of Board Members, Board of Governors
Charles S. Struckmeyer, Deputy Staff Director, Office of the Staff Director, Board of
Governors
Lawrence Slifman and William Wascher, Senior Associate Directors, Division of
Research and Statistics, Board of Governors
Andrew T. Levin, Senior Adviser, Office of Board Members, Board of Governors
Joyce K. Zickler, Visiting Senior Adviser, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of
Governors
Michael G. Palumbo, Associate Director, Division of Research and Statistics, Board of
Governors; Trevor A. Reeve,¹ Associate Director, Division of International Finance,
Board of Governors
Fabio M. Natalucci, Assistant Director, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of
Governors
David H. Small, Project Manager, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of Governors
Jeremy B. Rudd, Senior Economist, Division of Research and Statistics, Board of
Governors
James M. Lyon, First Vice President, Federal Reserve Bank of Minneapolis
Jamie J. McAndrews and Mark S. Sniderman, Executive Vice Presidents, Federal
Reserve Banks of New York and Cleveland, respectively
David Altig, Alan D. Barkema, Richard P. Dzina, David Marshall, Christopher J. Waller,
and John A. Weinberg, Senior Vice Presidents, Federal Reserve Banks of Atlanta, Kansas
City, New York, Chicago, St. Louis, and Richmond, respectively
John Fernald and Giovanni Olivei, Vice Presidents, Federal Reserve Banks of San
Francisco and Boston, respectively
_______________________
¹ Attended Tuesday’s session only.
April 26–27, 2011
3 of 244
Transcript of the Federal Open Market Committee Meeting on
April 26–27, 2011
April 26 Session
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Good morning, everybody. Welcome to the marathon
FOMC meeting. [Laughter] Thank you for accommodating the early start. As you know, we
have an extra go-round today. I hope this will not be the norm, but we’ll just have to see how
things evolve.
Given the topics this morning, I thought we would make this a joint FOMC–Board
meeting, and so I need a motion to close the meeting.
MS. YELLEN. So moved.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Without objection. Let’s begin, as usual, with
financial developments and open market operations, and I’ll turn to Brian Sack. Brian.
MR. SACK. 1 Thank you, Mr. Chairman. It was a complicated intermeeting
period in financial markets, as investors had to contend with several significant global
developments affecting risk sentiment, with domestic events highlighting the fiscal
challenges facing the United States, with economic data that led to a sizable
downgrade to expected GDP growth in the first half, and with a notable further rise in
energy and commodity prices. While these developments led to some volatility in
asset prices during the period, they did not significantly alter investors’ perceptions
about the likely course of the economy or monetary policy on balance.
As shown in the upper-left panel of your first exhibit, the expected path of the
federal funds rate is virtually unchanged from the last FOMC meeting. This outcome
is somewhat remarkable, given the number of important developments just noted and
the large number of speeches delivered by FOMC members expressing diverging
views on policy prospects. Current market prices suggest that investors expect the
federal funds rate to remain near its current level over the rest of the year and then to
move higher in the first half of next year. The Desk’s survey of primary dealers
shows a similar pattern, with respondents putting the highest odds on the first increase
in the federal funds rate target taking place in the first half of next year, although they
also see significant odds of policy tightening being delayed until the second half of
that year or later.
1
The materials used by Mr. Sack are appended to this transcript (appendix 1).
April 26–27, 2011
4 of 244
This policy outlook appears to be based on investors’ expectations for a sustained
economic recovery and some ongoing concerns about inflation. Investors saw the
incoming economic data as weaker than expected, leading them to reduce their firsthalf economic growth estimates notably, but they apparently did not substantially
lower their forecasts for growth further ahead. At the same time, some of the factors
that have contributed to investors’ concerns about inflation intensified, as energy and
commodity prices continued their steep climb, as shown in the upper-right panel.
The rise in energy and commodity prices put some upward pressure on near-term
breakeven inflation rates. More importantly, measures of the five-year, five-year
forward breakeven inflation rate also moved higher. This recent increase leaves the
Board measure near the levels observed over much of 2009 and 2010 but pushes the
Barclays measure slightly above its historical range. The increase in breakeven
inflation rates was associated with a modest rise in nominal Treasury yields over the
intermeeting period, as shown to the right.
A notable development in the Treasury market over the intermeeting period was
the announcement that Standard and Poor’s had revised its outlook for the long-term
credit rating of the United States from stable to negative. Not surprisingly, market
participants were already focused on the budgetary imbalances facing the United
States and the uncertainty about whether the political process will produce an
agreement to address those imbalances. The S&P announcement prompted an
immediate rise in Treasury yields, as summarized in the bottom-left panel, but the
effect did not persist, as investors saw the report as conveying little new information.
The fiscal difficulties facing the United States will remain at the forefront with the
looming debt ceiling problem. As shown in the panel to the right, the amount of
outstanding Treasury debt is projected to reach its statutory limit on or around
May 16. At that time, the Treasury would begin to employ a set of extraordinary
measures that allow it to temporarily finance the government without increasing the
level of debt subject to the ceiling. Our estimate is that such measures would allow
the Treasury to operate until mid-July. Yields on Treasury bills maturing around
these dates suggest that investors do not expect a significant market disruption from
the debt ceiling despite the uncertainties surrounding this process.
Your next exhibit turns to some of the international developments that affected
financial markets over the intermeeting period. Japanese equity prices fell
dramatically following the earthquake on March 11 and the nuclear problems that
ensued, as shown in the upper-left panel. While share prices have bounced back
some, the Nikkei index is still about 7 percent lower than its levels ahead of the
earthquake, reflecting concerns about the economic consequences of those events.
Despite these economic concerns, the yen strengthened sharply in the immediate
aftermath of the earthquake, as shown to the right. This pattern was likely due to
some unwinding of yen carry trades as global asset prices declined as well as the
anticipation of repatriation flows from insurers and retail investors.
April 26–27, 2011
5 of 244
In response to the movement in the yen, the G-7 authorities announced their
intention to conduct a coordinated currency intervention on March 18. As
summarized in the memo that was sent to the Committee at that time, operations were
conducted by each central bank that day during their respective trading hours. In
carrying out our operations, the Desk conducted two rounds of yen sales, with each
involving $500 million of transactions. Following the usual procedure, half of the
funds for the intervention came from the System Open Market Account and the other
half from the Treasury’s Exchange Stabilization Fund, with the SOMA transactions
authorized by the Foreign Currency Subcommittee of the FOMC. Overall, the
operations were carried out relatively quickly, with no operational difficulties.
Notable developments in financial markets also took place in the euro area. As
Nathan Sheets will discuss in his briefing, the Portuguese government requested
financial support from the European Union and the International Monetary Fund,
making it the third peripheral European country to do so. More recently, market
participants have become increasingly concerned about the possibility of a
restructuring of Greek sovereign debt. These developments led to a surge in the yield
spreads on the sovereign debt from these two countries, as shown in the middle-left
panel. Importantly, there has been only limited pass-through from these
developments to the pricing of Spanish and Italian debt, although some modest
spillover effects have been visible at times.
Despite the ongoing problems in peripheral countries, the incoming data on
economic activity for the euro area as a whole has been relatively strong, and
headline inflation has been elevated. In response, the European Central Bank raised
its benchmark policy rate by 25 basis points at its April 7 meeting, and several
additional policy actions are expected by year-end. The realized and prospective
policy tightening supported the euro, which gained 4 percent against the dollar,
shown in the middle-right panel. More broadly, the dollar depreciated against all
major currencies except the Japanese yen, leaving the broad dollar index more than
2 percent lower over the intermeeting period.
The potential risks from the various domestic and global developments and the
softer tone of the economic data did not manage to hold back U.S. equity prices. As
shown in the bottom-left panel, the S&P 500 index gained more than 3 percent over
the intermeeting period. Equity prices had fallen sharply around the time of the last
FOMC meeting, in part reflecting greater perceived uncertainty in the aftermath of
the Japanese earthquake. But investors’ uncertainty about the outlook has since
diminished, as shown by the VIX index in the panel to the right.
Returning to the bottom-left panel, one notable exception to the rally in equities
has been the financial sector. Although bank earnings for the first quarter have
generally met or exceeded analysts’ expectations, profit growth has been driven in
large part by reductions in loan loss provisions. Investors have increasingly worried
about the sources of ongoing earnings growth for these firms, leading to downward
pressure on their share prices.
April 26–27, 2011
6 of 244
Your third exhibit turns to monetary policy operations. As of today, the Desk will
have completed $422 billion of the $600 billion of intended Treasury purchases, in
addition to the ongoing reinvestment of principal payments from our agency debt and
mortgage-backed securities. Overall, the total pace of the Desk’s purchases has been
running at around $100 billion per month, as shown in the upper-left panel. If the
FOMC were to complete the $600 billion in asset purchases in June and maintain the
reinvestment policy thereafter, as assumed in the Tealbook, the Desk’s purchases
would decline to an average pace of about $10 billion per month over the second half
of the year.
The panel to the right shows the projected characteristics of the SOMA portfolio
as of the end of June under the Tealbook policy assumptions and compares them with
the SOMA portfolio at the time of the April 2010 FOMC meeting, when the
Committee last had an extensive discussion of its exit strategy. The most notable
changes to the portfolio over this period are the expansion of its size as a result of the
$600 billion asset purchase program, and the rotation of its composition from agency
debt and agency MBS to Treasury securities as a result of the reinvestment policy.
The effective duration of the portfolio has increased slightly over this period and
remains well above its historical levels of two to three years.
As Bill Nelson will discuss in his briefing on exit strategy, the Committee may
want to renormalize the balance sheet as part of its efforts to remove the current
degree of monetary policy accommodation. The policy discussion that occurred last
April suggested that Committee members were inclined to eventually sell the agency
MBS held in the SOMA portfolio as part of that process. Accordingly, the recent
decision by the Treasury to sell its agency MBS holdings may be of particular interest
to the Committee. The Treasury indicated that it would sell all of its agency MBS
holdings, totaling $142 billion, at a pace of up to $10 billion per month, depending on
market conditions.
Overall, the market has effectively absorbed the Treasury’s operations to date. As
shown in the middle-left panel, MBS spreads widened on the announcement,
particularly in the higher coupon securities for which sales were seen as potentially
more disruptive to the market. However, as sales got under way and were met with
strong demand, those concerns diminished, and MBS spreads retraced. Treasury
yields also experienced some mild upward pressure from the announcement.
However, consistent with the staff’s calibration of portfolio balance effects, this
response was small because of the limited size of the Treasury’s portfolio. A decision
by the FOMC to sell its MBS holdings could be more consequential for market
pricing and market functioning, given the much larger size of the Federal Reserve’s
holdings, highlighted in the middle-right panel.
The bottom panels of the exhibit turn to the effects of the change to the FDIC’s
deposit insurance assessment system that was implemented on April 1. This change
has implications for the behavior of the federal funds rate and other overnight market
interest rates relative to the interest rate that the Federal Reserve pays on reserve
balances (the IOER rate). In general, overnight market rates tend to remain relatively
April 26–27, 2011
7 of 244
close to the IOER rate because banks can borrow funds in the market and hold
reserves at the Federal Reserve. This activity represents an arbitrage opportunity in
which banks earn the difference between their borrowing rate and the IOER rate. The
new FDIC system makes this arbitrage more costly for domestic banks, as it imposes
a fee on all liabilities, including those used to fund reserve holdings. Banks therefore
require a larger yield spread to engage in the arbitrage activity, shifting their demand
for funds in a way that has caused overnight market interest rates to fall.
As shown in the bottom-left panel, since the imposition of the fee, the federal
funds rate has traded at a level of around 10 basis points—about 4 basis points below
its average level in March. That decline is of the order of magnitude that the staff had
expected in response to the fee. Some observers have suggested that the FDIC fee
diminishes our control of the federal funds rate in a significant way. However,
although the FDIC fee creates a wider spread between the federal funds rate and the
IOER rate, the staff believes that it will not reduce the responsiveness of the federal
funds rate to changes in the IOER rate and hence does not diminish our control.
A more surprising aspect of the market effects of the FDIC fee has been the
abrupt reaction of repo rates. We had expected downward pressure on repo rates
because banks would be less inclined to obtain funding in the repo market, limiting
the supply of Treasury collateral in that market. However, the Treasury general
collateral repo rate fell more sharply than the federal funds rate, moving to near zero
for several days, and has exhibited considerable volatility.
As these events have unfolded, we have also observed a significant pickup in
activity at the Desk’s securities lending program, as shown in the bottom-right panel,
suggesting that more individual Treasury issues have traded with a scarcity premium.
Note, however, that our securities lending program does not address the overall
shortage of Treasury collateral or the low levels of general collateral repo rates, as
participants have to provide us with Treasury securities in order to obtain specific
Treasury issues from us. For that reason, some market participants have argued for
the Desk to conduct reverse repurchase agreements to provide more Treasury
collateral to the market and to lift the repo rate toward the federal funds rate.
However, given the volatility of the repo rate, it may be prudent to allow more time
for market participants to adjust their behavior and to assess where the repo rate
settles relative to the federal funds rate before considering any such steps.
Your final exhibit summarizes some of the results from the Desk’s survey of
primary dealers. The survey this time included additional questions to gauge the
expectations of market participants about the FOMC’s strategy for removing policy
accommodation. To state the obvious, there is no presumption that the FOMC has to
follow market expectations, and those expectations can be shaped or redirected
though FOMC communications going forward.
Market participants expect the Federal Reserve to take a number of policy steps in
the process of removing accommodation, as indicated in the upper-left panel. All
survey respondents expect the FOMC to change the “extended period” language
April 26–27, 2011
8 of 244
before raising the federal funds rate target, and nearly all expect the interest rate on
reserves to be adjusted at the same time as the federal funds rate target. As indicated
by the blue dots in the panel to the right, the median respondent expects the change in
policy language to occur three meetings before the change in the target rate.
In addition, all respondents expect the Federal Reserve to employ its two
temporary reserve draining tools as part of the exit process, with a large majority
anticipating such a step before an increase in the target rate. The interquartile range
of responses, shown by the blue bar in the right panel, places the use of these tools
one to three meetings in advance of the target rate change, with the median response
just one meeting in advance.
In terms of steps for reducing the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet, respondents
see asset redemptions as likely to occur relatively early. Indeed, nearly all
respondents expect the FOMC to begin redeeming its agency debt and MBS holdings
before raising the federal funds rate target, and about half also expect Treasury
redemptions to occur on this time frame. Other respondents expect Treasury
redemptions to occur either at the same time or after the target rate is increased,
leaving only 15 percent expecting them to never occur. The interquartile range of
responses on Treasury redemptions was the largest among all of the steps, suggesting
that there is more uncertainty about the timing of this action.
Most respondents also expect the FOMC to sell assets. Of those expecting asset
sales, virtually all saw this step as occurring after the first increase in the federal
funds rate target, with the interquartile range of responses spanning two to six
meetings after the target rate increase. Dealers continue to place high odds on
Treasury sales in addition to MBS sales.
These policy steps put the expected size of the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet on
a gradual downward trajectory. The median survey response for the size of the
balance sheet, shown by the dark blue line in the middle-left panel, is virtually
identical to the path that is realized under the Tealbook policy assumptions, shown by
the light blue line that is barely visible.
Despite this decline, the balance sheet is still expected to be very large at the time
of the first increase in the federal funds rate target. As a result, there would
presumably be a large amount of excess reserves in the banking system at that time,
unless they were aggressively drained using term deposits and reverse repurchase
agreements. As shown in the middle-right panel, the majority of respondents
anticipate that reserves will still be $1.2 trillion or higher at the time of the first
increase in the target rate. The remaining responses were spread out over a wide
range, with some suggesting that draining operations would be used in very large
scale.
We also used the survey to gauge the view of market participants on how
aggressively the reserve draining tools could be ramped up without creating market
dislocations. As shown in the bottom-left panel, respondents thought that we could
April 26–27, 2011
9 of 244
use the tools to drain about $500 billion of reserves over a six-week period, with that
total about evenly split between the two tools.
The bottom-right panel addresses the effectiveness of paying interest on reserves
for controlling the federal funds rate. Specifically, it reports the expected gap (in
basis points) between the IOER rate and the effective federal funds rate for different
combinations of the amount of excess reserves and the level of short-term interest
rates. For example, with $1.5 trillion in excess reserve balances, the federal funds
rate would be expected to trade 16 basis points below the IOER rate when the latter is
set to 25 basis points, corresponding to the rates observed today.
As can be seen by moving to the right on the table, the relationship between the
effective federal funds rate and the IOER rate is expected to tighten as the level of
reserve balances declines, with a fairly tight range reached at $500 billion of reserves.
Even at very high levels of reserves, though, paying interest on reserves is seen as
providing fairly effective control of the federal funds rate. Indeed, with excess
reserves near their current level of $1.5 trillion, the expected gap only widens to
25 basis points as the IOER rate is increased to 2 percent.
Finally, on a topic unrelated to the earlier material, I would like to request a vote
to renew our long-standing bilateral swap lines of $2 billion with Canada and
$3 billion with Mexico. Ahead of the meeting, Nathan Sheets and I sent the
Committee a memo recommending renewal of the swap lines at this time. Our
proposal is to keep the swap lines in their current form. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you, Brian. One other vote that we will be
requesting is the ratification of foreign exchange transactions over the intermeeting period. So I
thought I would just say a word about the intervention that the Federal Reserve participated in
with respect to the yen.
As you know, the FOMC delegates to the Foreign Currency Subcommittee—the
Chairman and Vice Chairman of the FOMC and Vice Chair of the Board—the authority to
authorize interventions if they are sufficiently small and if time does not permit consultation with
the full Committee. I think both of those conditions were easily met. As you know, we haven’t
intervened for more than a decade, but following the earthquake and tsunami, there were some
quite extraordinary circumstances. The Japanese called the G-7, cited large moves in the yen in
relatively illiquid trading conditions, and asked for us to participate in a joint intervention. I
April 26–27, 2011
10 of 244
think there was some basis for their concerns about the foreign exchange market, but I think the
response of their colleagues was more about solidarity for the courage that they were showing
under extreme circumstances. So under the leadership of Treasury Secretary Geithner and the
other G-7 leaders, we agreed to participate in an intervention.
It was a very short time lag; the time between the call when the Japanese made the
request and the actual intervention announcement was less than two hours, so there was really
not time to consult. The amount involved was very small—$500 million from the Fed,
$500 million from the Treasury—with most of the intervention being done by the Bank of Japan.
There was no commitment to any additional action, and I don’t expect any, barring some major
unanticipated developments. This appears to have met the criteria set forward by the Committee,
but I wanted just to add that in case there are any questions or comments on that subject.
Now let me open the floor for questions for Brian on his presentation or anything on the
foreign exchange market. Any questions? President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Yes, a couple of questions for Brian. If the debt ceiling is resolved on
time, have you been in conversations with the Treasury about the pace at which the
Supplementary Financing Program will be reinstated?
MR. SACK. We have not been in active discussions about that, given the uncertainties
about the debt ceiling. I think there is general agreement that the SFP could be brought back up
to its previous size with a sufficient increase in the debt ceiling. But no, we haven’t had detailed
conversations about it recently.
MR. LACKER. Okay. My second question has to do with MBS sales. In discussing the
Treasury sales, you noted the large difference between the magnitude of our holdings and the
magnitude of their sales and holdings. And you said that Fed sales, because they would involve
April 26–27, 2011
11 of 244
such a large amount, could have implications for market pricing and market functioning. In
preparing for this meeting, I looked at the November transcript where I asked you about the pace
of our purchases, and what sort of factors you thought would motivate limiting the pace of our
purchases. You said essentially two things: One was operational capabilities, and the other was
the potential for affecting market functioning. You were careful to distinguish between the
pricing effect, which, as you noted, was presumably the desired effect of the policy, and what
you called market liquidity. And what you described was that we didn’t want to create too much
of a one-sided market by buying too much, resulting in lower trading volumes between other
parties and higher bid-asked spreads and all.
So going in the other direction and selling things, do you think about the effect on market
functioning the same way? I mean, it’s unlikely to result in a one-sided market, right? We are
putting more things out there, and a lower trading volume seems unlikely because there is going
to be more float out there. How do you think about the potential market-functioning effects,
apart from the pricing effects? The broad motivation for this question, obviously, is, how fast
could we conceivably think about selling our assets?
MR. SACK. I think about the market-functioning aspects in many of the same ways—
though maybe not entirely. I think rapid sales could be difficult for the market to digest and
could result in a one-sided market where dealers have more trouble making markets and where
other participants are less inclined to participate, given the heavy flow coming from one single
seller. So I think the same concerns would apply if we are talking about a pace of sales that’s
very high.
One thing we’ve learned from the Treasury decision, though, is that the pace that they
have set out, of up to $10 billion a month, seems to have been fairly easily digested so far. It
April 26–27, 2011
12 of 244
does not seem to be raising any problems with market functioning. And $10 billion a month is
not a lot of net supply relative to the history of the MBS market. In the early 2000s, there was
$200 billion to $300 billion of net supply coming to the market each year—something on the
order of $20-some billion a month. There is not much net supply coming from fundamentals
today, so the Treasury adding their $10 billion to net supply hasn’t been too disruptive.
There’s one difference: When you are selling assets out of your portfolio, these are
seasoned securities, or what are called specified pools; they’re not the production securities in
the TBA market. We had a little bit of uncertainty about gauging whether $10 billion was a lot
or not, because these were seasoned securities, but I think what we have learned from the
Treasury program is that the market has been able to digest that. The concerns about market
functioning, I think, would apply if the Committee were to consider much more rapid paces of
MBS sales than $10 billion.
MR. LACKER. Can I follow up, Mr. Chairman? I want to learn more about this concern
about market functioning. The way I thought about your comments in November was that—for
the standard market microstructure model—marketmakers commit some capital based on
expected returns and expected deal flow. If we are buying a lot, I can see why the market would
shrink and the number of marketmakers ought to shrink. But my intuition about flipping that
around and applying it to a situation where we are selling would be that the number of
marketmakers would increase and spreads would fall. Do you have some other model in mind,
or am I missing something in applying the standard model to this?
MR. SACK. Yes, I do. As I said, I have many of the same concerns with market
functioning in terms of selling. But I agree with you, it is not the same, and there are some
things that are asymmetric. In terms of the available float, tradable float to the market, that’s
April 26–27, 2011
13 of 244
very different. When we were buying very actively, we were removing a lot of the tradable float,
and that was likely impairing market liquidity. And, of course, when we’re selling, we are
providing supply to the market that it can trade. However, as I mentioned, we are not selling the
most actively traded TBA securities in the market. We will be selling these more seasoned, more
specific pools, which may limit that benefit to some degree.
The concern I was raising was that, if the market thought that there was a single seller
who would be in very aggressively, and maybe unpredictably, it would be harder for
marketmakers to make markets and provide liquidity to the market. So it is the uncertainty, I
would say, about what the effect of a very aggressive sales program would be that would limit
market functioning. But I want to emphasize that this would be at paces well above what the
Treasury decided upon. We think that there is some room to sell at a decent pace without
causing significant market disruption.
MR. LACKER. Okay. You took pains to reduce the uncertainty about the pace of our
purchases, and I’m assuming you did the same thing for the sales, too. So the uncertainty around
our sales can’t be large, can it?
MR. SACK. Well, I think that would depend on what the FOMC communicated. And
then, given what the FOMC has communicated, we would decide if there were additional details
for the Desk to communicate. But I agree that communicating about the sales strategy would
help.
MR. LACKER. That seems like a price effect—that they’re uncertain where the price is
going to be, as we are—and that seems like a policy consideration as opposed to market
functioning.
April 26–27, 2011
14 of 244
MR. SACK. Of course, in addition to the market-functioning aspects, as policymakers,
you will also worry about the market-pricing effect, because we would assume that more-rapid
sales programs would put upward pressure on long-term interest rates.
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Other questions for Brian? President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I am looking at figure 24, “Expected
Spread between IOER Rate and Federal Funds Rate.” If I’m reading this correctly, IOER goes
up and the spread gets larger. Why is that? I would think the arbitrage would be the arbitrage,
given the fees that are in the market. So why does the spread go up?
MR. SACK. The current level of the spread is constrained by the arbitrage, but it’s also
constrained by the zero bound on nominal interest rates, which is presumably limiting the spread
that we see. Let’s say the arbitrage hypothetically required 30 basis points. We know the fed
funds rate wouldn’t go to minus 5, so the zero bound is providing a limit on how big that spread
can get. I think what you are seeing is that, as IOER goes up, that limit goes away, and the
spread increases. Having said all that, at any level of the IOER rate, we think that arbitrage is
relevant and does put a cap on how big that spread can be, because if that spread gets too large,
firms will come in and do the arbitrage. So that’s why the spread only rises to 25 basis points,
even with such a large amount of reserves.
MR. BULLARD. Okay. That makes sense, but then the zero bound is still a factor, I
guess, between, say, 1 and 2 percent on the IOER?
MR. SACK. Under the story I just told, you would expect the same gap at 1 and 2, and
that’s not consistently represented in the table. For some of the columns, you see that pattern—
that the gap widens a lot from 25 basis points to 100 basis points on IOER, and then widens only
April 26–27, 2011
15 of 244
marginally more as you go to 200 basis points on IOER. That’s true for all of the columns
except for the first one. So, my guess is that the gap that we will see between market interest
rates and the IOER rate could widen as we move up from current levels, but, for the reason you
noted, will reach a constant level, a steady-state level, well before the IOER rate gets to
2 percent.
MR. BULLARD. Okay. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I have a question about figure 23.
This represents the primary dealers’ estimates of our draining capacity. I was wondering what
the staff’s own estimates would be of that number.
MR. SACK. This is the draining capacity over a short time.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. The intermeeting period, a relatively short period of time.
MR. SACK. I’ll speak for myself, and maybe not the staff as a whole. My own
impression is that these responses are pretty aggressive, especially on the reverse repo side. If
the mandate were to drain $500 billion of reserves or more, I think it may be prudent to spread
that process out a bit more than over one intermeeting period.
When we do reverse repurchase agreements, we are taking funding away from dealers
and other participants in the market. So there has to be this change in short-term credit flows
because, ultimately, the reserves are going to come out of the banks; it requires a change of how
the credit flows. I think we are unsure about how easily the market adjusts as it moves through
that chain, and so I think there is good reason to be gradual and to give the market more time
than six weeks to make those adjustments.
April 26–27, 2011
16 of 244
I think the capacity to ramp up term deposits quickly is perhaps a bit greater than reverse
repos because it doesn’t require any re-intermediation of credit. It’s just a change in the nature
of banks’ assets.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. A relabeling, almost. If I might follow up, I understand your
concerns on reverse repos. What would be your concerns about what kinds of constraints we
would face in terms of the use of TDFs?
MR. ENGLISH. I think on the term deposits, the question is simply that there’s a lot of
uncertainty about the level of reserves that people will provide to us at a given price. I mean, at a
high enough price, we are pretty confident we could drain a lot of reserves, but we don’t know
what that supply curve looks like.
I think another issue that would suggest that having a little more time would be helpful is
that some institutions have not participated thus far in our TDF operations but have suggested
that, if this gets serious, they would want to sign up and begin participating. We would want
some time to get the new entrants integrated into the TDF program so that there would be more
capacity as they came in.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thanks.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. Yes—a clarification, Brian. I’m looking at figures 17 and 18 on page 3
about the GC repos and the securities lending. You made a comment that part of the problem
was the lack of Treasury collateral in some of these markets, which helps to explain a little bit of
the rise in the securities lending and some of the differences in the repo rates. Is that related at
all to the fact that we are buying most of the Treasuries that are coming out through our purchase
plan, and that we are actually making Treasury collateral scarce in doing this exercise?
April 26–27, 2011
17 of 244
MR. SACK. The underlying market conditions coming into the FDIC fee were relevant.
We’ve been conducting asset purchases, and that has left less collateral in the market than it
otherwise would have had; at the same time, the Treasury has run down the SFP, which also has
taken Treasury collateral out of the market. So there was a backdrop of less collateral available,
but it wasn’t causing significant disruption or problems for the market. What happened with the
FDIC fee was much more of an abrupt shift. Just to be clear, we had expected the repo rate to
move down roughly in line with the federal funds rate for the same reasons that apply to the
federal funds rate. But what happened was that the adjustment was more abrupt. It seemed that
the decision by some market participants not to do the arbitrage—not to fund themselves in the
repo market, pulling that collateral out of the market—really made it difficult for the market to
adjust in the short term. I would say that the things you point to provide a backdrop of some
shortage but not problems, but then the FDIC fee resulted in a much more abrupt adjustment.
MR. PLOSSER. But if you go to the other panel, with the securities lending, since
November there’s been a rather marked increase in securities lending by the Fed. That’s the
background you’re talking about?
MR. SACK. That is the background I’m talking about, and I think in part that upward
trend is related to us taking Treasury securities out of the market.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Fisher.
MR. FISHER. Mr. Chairman, I don’t know if the questions are over, but I would like to
move that we accept the proposal for the extension of the swap lines from Mexico and Canada
and approve the Desk operations as you suggested.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. So there are three measures: open market
operations, foreign exchange operations, and the swap agreements.
April 26–27, 2011
18 of 244
MR. FISHER. I would like to move acceptance of all three.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Before we do that, though, let me just make
sure—Governor Duke, did you have a question?
MS. DUKE. I just had one question. Can you give me a sense of the relative size of the
Treasury GC repo market and the current fed funds market?
MR. SACK. Yes. There are different ways to measure this, but one way is to compare
average daily volumes among dealers. For federal funds, we’ve been seeing $40 billion to
$50 billion of transactions daily. For Treasury GC repos, just to the dealers, it’s been
$500 billion to $600 billion.
MS. DUKE. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Brian, a more general question on your outlook for the effect of the
FDIC fee on the repo market. When we were considering the zero lower bound, we were
concerned that there could be a destruction in the infrastructure that would occur over time with
professionals leaving because they couldn’t operate at that low level, and then generally that
there could be a relationship to IOER and its ability to have the effects we want as we begin to
raise it. Can you generally talk about your concern about whether this fee complicates our life
over the longer term?
MR. SACK. Yes, I can. There’s been a slight decline in funding activity in these
markets as the FDIC fee was imposed, but it’s been fairly modest. Even at these new prices, it
seems like there is active intermediation of credit taking place, and, in that sense, the markets
continue to function.
April 26–27, 2011
19 of 244
Another pressure point, however, is the implications for money market mutual funds. At
this point, essentially, Treasury-only money funds will be operating at a loss, and essentially the
fund complexes will likely be subsidizing those funds if they want to continue to offer them.
They may choose to do so. Many of them feel that these types of funds are an important part of a
suite of products that they offer customers. As repo rates got extremely low, we did have several
money funds raise complaints to us about this phenomenon, with at least one indicating that it
couldn’t sustain some of its funds beyond the summer at these levels. So I think what we will do
is continue to reach out and listen to that type of anecdotal evidence. At this point, that was just
one fund, but we are going to try to get a sense of how widespread it is. There’s no doubt that as
Treasury repo rates and Treasury bill rates come in, that’s going to put additional pressure on the
profit margins of the money funds. The prime funds still seem quite okay. There is enough yield
pickup as they move into other products that we don’t think at this point that they’re generally
under pressure.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Any other questions? [No response] All right. We have a
motion on all three of these measures. Let’s take them one at a time. Open market operations—
can I have a second?
MS. YELLEN. Second.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Any further questions or comments? [No response]
Without objection. Foreign exchange transactions—second?
MS. YELLEN. Second.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Any comments or questions? [No response]
Without objection. And, finally, the renewal of the standing swap agreements with Canada and
Mexico. I need a second.
April 26–27, 2011
20 of 244
MS. YELLEN. Second.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Any objections, comments? [No response] All
right. Thank you.
Let’s go on, next, to item 2, Strategies for Removing Policy Accommodation. A
memorandum was distributed from the staff on April 19, and we will begin with Bill Nelson
making a presentation. Bill.
MR. NELSON. 2 Thank you Mr. Chairman. At its meeting a year ago, the
Committee discussed strategies for removing policy accommodation and normalizing
the balance sheet over time. Shortly thereafter, in response to a weakening in the
economic outlook and the threat of deflation, you instead provided additional policy
accommodation by expanding the balance sheet further. At the risk of tempting fate
[laughter], last week the staff again sent you a memo on strategies for removing
accommodation and normalizing the balance sheet.
In your previous discussion, you appeared to agree on two broad principles for
your exit strategy. First, the SOMA portfolio should be returned to a normal size and
an all-Treasuries composition over the intermediate term, which will require sales of
agency securities at some point. And second, sales of SOMA securities should be
implemented using a framework that would be communicated in advance and at a
pace that potentially could be adjusted in response to changes in economic and
financial conditions. Issues that remained open included the appropriate sensitivity of
sales to changes in the economic outlook, how quickly sales should proceed, whether
to redeem Treasury securities in order to shrink the balance sheet more rapidly, and
whether to use reverse repurchase agreements and term deposits to drain reserves
before raising your target for the federal funds rate. In addition, you will now also
need to decide when to stop the reinvestment of principal payments on agency
securities into longer-term Treasury securities. And, of course, you will also have to
decide on the appropriate sequence for these policy actions.
To some extent, these decisions can be reduced to choices about a few key policy
issues. The first issue is the timing and pace of balance sheet reduction. Both raising
short-term interest rates and reducing the Federal Reserve’s holdings of longer-term
securities would restrain economic activity by tightening financial conditions, so
there is a degree of substitutability between these two policy levers. To accomplish
essentially the same outcome, the Committee could sell assets sooner and faster but
raise the target for the federal funds rate later and more slowly, or you could sell
assets later and more slowly but increase the federal funds rate target sooner and
faster. You likely see the key advantages to selling assets sooner and faster to be the
more rapid return to a normal policy environment, the reduction in any upside risks to
2
The materials used by Mr. Nelson are appended to this transcript (appendix 2).
April 26–27, 2011
21 of 244
inflation stemming from outsized asset holdings and reserve balances, and the more
limited scope for your holdings of agency securities to unduly allocate credit to a
particular sector of the economy. You may see the principal advantages of selling
assets later and more slowly to be a reduced risk that the market could react sharply,
boosting longer-term rates significantly and weakening or even derailing the recovery
at a time when the federal funds rate was still constrained by the lower bound, and
possibly that the associated earlier liftoff of the funds rate and flatter yield curve
would be less likely to lead to financial imbalances.
The second key policy issue is the responsiveness of the balance sheet to
economic conditions. The pace of sales could be quite responsive to economic
conditions, or sales could instead occur in a nearly deterministic manner. Under a
state-contingent approach for adjusting the balance sheet, the FOMC would be
actively employing two policy instruments to achieve its economic objectives.
State-contingent sales could increase the scope and flexibility for adjusting financial
conditions; for example, more-rapid sales could withdraw accommodation quickly
even if the Committee were reluctant to raise the federal funds rate aggressively,
while ceasing or even reversing sales could ease policy even if the funds rate was still
constrained by the zero bound. On the other hand, you may see advantages to using
the funds rate target as your active policy instrument while setting asset sales on a
largely deterministic path. Because the effects of the federal funds rate on financial
markets and the economy are better understood than the effects of changes in the
balance sheet, such an approach may result in policy that is easier for you to calibrate
and easier for market participants to understand. Indeed, you only turned to the
balance sheet as a tool for easing policy once the funds rate was constrained by the
zero bound, and there is no corresponding constraint that prevents you from using the
funds rate as a means for tightening policy. Of course, there are policy options that
fall in between: For example, an approach that increases the pace of assets sales to a
limited degree as the economy strengthens and as you determine the pace of sales that
markets can bear could permit a more rapid normalization of the balance sheet than
sticking with the pace of sales that was appropriate earlier on.
In the staff memo, we also indicated a couple of areas where we thought you
would find a particular approach to be preferable. First we see several advantages to
redeeming your holdings of Treasury and agency securities once you decide the time
has arrived to reduce the size of the balance sheet. Redemptions are operationally
simple, transparent, easily communicated, and potentially less disruptive to markets
than asset sales. Although redeeming Treasury securities would not result in a
speedier normalization of the composition of the SOMA, it would hasten the
normalization of its size. Second, in the event that the balance sheet is elevated when
you expect to soon begin raising your target for the federal funds rate, we see a strong
case for first using reverse repurchase agreements and term deposits to drain some
portion of reserves in advance of liftoff. Such an approach will put the Federal
Reserve in a better position to assess the effectiveness of the draining tools and judge
the size of draining operations that might be required to support changes in the IOER
rate in implementing a desired increase in short-term rates. Moreover, it will better
April 26–27, 2011
22 of 244
prepare both the Federal Reserve and market participants if it turns out that those
tools have to be used in significant size.
In order to cast these strategic issues in more concrete terms, the memo also
discusses in some detail two possible exit scenarios. The timing for the two options
was chosen so that they yield very similar macroeconomic outcomes in simulations
with the FRB/US model, but the advantages of one option or the other do not depend
intrinsically on the specific timing assumed in the memo. Of course, in practice the
Committee might move more rapidly or more slowly, depending on your assessment
of appropriate policy and on economic developments.
Option 1 is intended to maintain the federal funds rate as the primary policy
instrument while putting the balance sheet on a path to normalization that takes place
at a gradual and predictable pace. Under this option, if the economy were to follow
the baseline Tealbook outlook, the staff assumes that the Committee would begin
redeeming securities in December of this year, drop the “extended period” language
and commence reserve draining operations in March of next year, raise its target for
the federal funds rate in September of next year, and begin sales of agency securities
in March 2013. Sales of agency securities under this option would be calibrated to
return the portfolio to an all-Treasuries composition over five years, and the pace of
sales would be adjusted only if economic conditions deviated substantially from what
was expected when sales were initiated. The portfolio reaches its steady-state growth
path by late 2015, and sales of agency securities offset by purchases of Treasuries
continue through early 2018.
Option 2 is constructed to normalize the balance sheet sooner and to use asset
sales as an active policy instrument. Under the baseline economic assumptions,
redemptions begin in December of this year and sales begin in June of next year.
With sales happening sooner and proceeding more briskly, the federal funds rate
would not be increased until December of next year, three months later than in
option 1. With that timing, the “extended period” language would be modified or
dropped soon after the June 2012 decision to begin selling assets, for example, in
September 2012, at which point the Committee would also commence reserve
draining using term deposits and reverse repurchase agreements. Sales of agency
securities under this option would be calibrated to return the portfolio to an
all-Treasuries composition over three years given the projected economic outlook.
Under the baseline economic assumptions, the balance sheet would return to its
steady-state growth path in early 2015, about one year earlier than in option 1, and the
last agency security would be sold by August 2015, nearly two and a half years
sooner than under option 1.
Of course, a number of variants on these two approaches are also possible. For
one, President Plosser has proposed an approach similar to option 2, only in which
redemptions, sales, and the tightening of the federal funds rate target begin at the
same time. Under his proposed approach, a portion of sales would be deterministic,
but sales would also step up during intermeeting periods following an increase in the
federal funds rate target. For another, President Kocherlakota has proposed an
April 26–27, 2011
23 of 244
approach similar to option 1, except redemptions would begin later, at the same time
sales commenced, and principal payments on agency MBS would continue to be
reinvested in Treasury securities.
The two options produce different paths for Federal Reserve income, remittances
to the Treasury, and realized and unrealized capital losses—that is, the options
discussed in the memo, not the options that the presidents introduced. The
cumulative amounts of remittances to Treasury under the two approaches are similar,
in part because the projected paths for longer-term interest rates in the two options are
little different. However, remittances are somewhat lower in the middle of the decade
under option 2 because the relatively rapid pace of securities sales at that time boosts
realized capital losses. Remittances under option 2 subsequently move above those in
option 1 because the earlier completion of sales means that realized losses end sooner.
The Federal Reserve would report larger and more long-lived unrealized capital
losses under option 1 because of the later start and slower pace of asset sales. The
risks to Federal Reserve income and remittances to the Treasury would also differ
across the options, as discussed in the memo.
Last week the staff also provided you with an additional background memo on
longer-run policy implementation frameworks. In the staff’s view, the Committee
can choose an exit strategy independently of its choice of a longer-run policy
framework. Any exit strategy will likely involve an elevated balance sheet with the
federal funds rate target near the IOER rate—as in floor-type systems—for some
time. If the FOMC desired to eventually move to a corridor-type system for the
federal funds rate, it could do so by continuing to drain reserves until they reached a
level that would be associated with the federal funds rate trading above the IOER
rate. Alternatively, the FOMC could maintain a floor-type system for the federal
funds rate by halting the decline of the balance sheet at a higher level of reserves.
We’ve distributed a handout titled “Strategies for Removing Accommodation”
that reproduces the list of questions for your discussion that was circulated late last
week. That concludes my prepared remarks. We would be happy to answer your
questions.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Are there questions for Bill? Governor
Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Bill, in the memo that you circulated
earlier, and to some degree in your presentation this morning, there is a hint, but not an explicit
statement, of the proposition that the choice between option 1 and option 2, and variants thereon,
would be tied, at least, to the relative pace of tightening that we would eventually want to
undertake. Is that a correct inference to draw?
April 26–27, 2011
24 of 244
MR. NELSON. I don’t think so. Just because we calibrated the two options so that they
delivered the same amount of monetary tightening, they remove accommodation to the same
degree and deliver the same macroeconomic outcome.
MR. TARULLO. So let me ask this question somewhat differently. To what degree
would the pros and cons of the two options be different depending on whether the Committee’s
ultimate choice was a fairly gradual tightening or a fairly rapid tightening?
MR. NELSON. I suppose one advantage of option 2, of sales earlier, is that if the
Committee felt that it needed to tighten quickly, it would drain reserves more rapidly and thus set
up the commencement of tightening of the federal funds rate sooner. On the other hand, if the
Committee felt that it needed to tighten more gradually, it might be reluctant to engage in asset
sales earlier because there is a lot of uncertainty about their effect on the economy. It would
seem that at a point when the economy might be on less firm footing, the asset sales might pose
greater risk.
MR. TARULLO. Okay. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. There’s a question from President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. A question both for Bill and Brian Sack.
I think you suggested that we may want to drain in advance of moving the fed funds rate. Do
you have any sense of how sharp the market reaction would be in long rates to the beginning of
draining? My thoughts: The market would anticipate that that is a precursor, obviously, to
moving the fed funds rate, and there would probably be an immediate reaction. Is there any way
to estimate how much that reaction would be?
MR. NELSON. I can’t think of any way to estimate that. I agree that it would certainly
be a communication challenge, if you were to drain and mean it to be just a change in the
April 26–27, 2011
25 of 244
liabilities on your balance sheet and not the commencement of tightening. I think people would
realize that by draining, you are setting the groundwork for raising the IOER rate and the target
federal funds rate. So I think the market reaction would be sharp, but it would in part depend
upon the communications.
MR. SACK. I would just add, I think most of us would argue that the statement language
is a much better vehicle for conveying information to the market about the expected timing of
policy action. And, indeed, one of the reasons that in the memo we put draining after changing
“extended period” was just for that reason. I would argue that, through your communications,
you should try to make it clear—if you agree—that the draining patterns aren’t intended to be a
signal about the timing of policy tightening because I think the statement is a much clearer signal
in that regard.
MR. ENGLISH. But that said, I think the basic point is right—when the market
perceives that the Committee is starting in the direction of tightening, they’ll react to that, and
you’ll see some effect in markets. How large or small that is will depend, I think, a great deal on
how that is communicated: what the statement says and, potentially, speeches, press
conferences, whatever it is around that. But it will be a moment when communication will be
very important.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. It would also depend on what expectations were before that
announcement was made. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. Is there any reason to believe that that reaction will be any different this
time than it would be in any other tightening cycle where we reverse? In most cycles we reverse
course at some point. Is there any reason to believe that’s any more of a concern in this period
than in any other period?
April 26–27, 2011
26 of 244
MR. SACK. I think that in any period, the evolution of expectations of tightening is
going to tighten financial conditions in advance of the actual policy tightening. And in most
cycles that would occur exclusively through the FOMC statement, because you wouldn’t have
these other steps in the process, such as redemptions or reserve draining and so on. So I think
the ultimate effect on markets is going to depend on the same thing, which is how the
expectations of the policy evolve, and it is a matter of managing which policy steps are
conveying those signals.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Other questions?
MR. HOENIG. I have one.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Hoenig.
MR. HOENIG. Just curious. Let’s assume for the moment that inflationary pressures
become more pronounced and the markets become more convinced that it is perennial if we
don’t take an action. Which of the options— in terms of either moving your funds rate or selling
assets at that point —do you think would have the greatest effect on changing expectations about
inflation?
MR. ENGLISH. I guess it is not obvious to me that there would be a big difference
between the two. Either way, if the Committee was clear that it was concerned about inflation,
that it was taking steps to tighten policy to address those concerns, I would have thought the
communication would be clear, I’m assuming, and the market would react appropriately.
MR. HOENIG. Then it wouldn’t matter which option you’d choose—at that point you’d
want to move more quickly, right? So that would push that option forward.
MR. ENGLISH. The steps would come in more rapid succession, I agree, and I think
you could do that under either option.
April 26–27, 2011
27 of 244
MR. SACK. My own view, though, is that your big gun is the short rate. So a change in
the “extended period” language signaling an earlier, more rapid tightening of short rates, I think,
would be your most powerful instrument for tightening financial conditions.
MR. HOENIG. Rather than selling the assets?
MR. SACK. Right. And you can see that in the staff’s simulations right now. At the end
of the second quarter when the asset purchase programs finish, the staff estimates about 40 basis
points of effect on the term premium from our elevated asset holdings. So selling the assets
more quickly would shrink that effect. But, of course, you could achieve a lot more tightening
than that, if desired, through the path of the short-term interest rate and the signals that you send
about it.
MR. HOENIG. So, you would begin with the repos and so forth to get the rate up more
quickly and then allow your balance sheet to run off?
MR. NELSON. You can drain a considerable amount very quickly with redemptions as
well.
MR. SACK. I agree with what Bill and Bill said, that the entire sequence could be
shifted and accelerated, but I was answering the question: Out of all the tools, what do you think
the most powerful tool is? I think we would all agree, it’s still your traditional policy instrument.
MR. HOENIG. Okay. I appreciate that.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Other questions? [No response] Okay. In a moment we’ll
begin a go-round to hear views on these and other issues. There are some questions that staff
provided just as thought starters, but I’m sure you won’t constrain yourselves necessarily.
[Laughter]
April 26–27, 2011
28 of 244
Let me say a word about what I would like to get out of this. I will have to discuss this
with the press tomorrow, and I would like to provide as much information as I can, but no more
than I should. Certainly, what I will say initially will be that we discussed this issue, that a
discussion of the exit process is a separate thing from making the decision to exit, and that it
doesn’t necessarily signal any change in our stance; it’s a separate issue. I want to emphasize the
provisional aspects of this—that, as President Hoenig was suggesting, if conditions were
different than anticipated, we might want to change the timing, pace, and so on. It would depend
on economic conditions, and then our communication will try to provide as much information as
possible about that. Those will be some general points, but beyond that, if I can get from this
discussion some principles—for example, that the interest on excess reserves is the main tool
supported by reserve drains, that the balance sheet will be adjusted in certain ways—those
obviously would be helpful. If not, I will just be more general.
One final note on this: The operating framework per se is a big topic and it is not
necessarily part of our discussion today, but it does have some bearing potentially on, for
example, how quickly we reduce the size of the balance sheet. For example, if we want to use a
floor system, we might not need to reduce the balance sheet as quickly. To the extent that the
operating system bears on this issue, you should feel free to bring that up. Again, I’ll be taking
careful notes, and I hope I can come up with some general principles, which I will then review
with you to see if I can get a sense of the Committee from this discussion.
Before ending, without trying to preempt the discussion at all, I thought I would make a
couple of observations that I found useful in thinking about this. One is simply that redemptions
are a pretty powerful tool here. If we were to begin redeeming both Treasuries and MBS in
December 2011, as assumed by the Tealbook, that would reduce the size of the balance sheet by
April 26–27, 2011
29 of 244
more than $1 trillion over four years, and we would be back essentially to normal size in four
and a half years. Now, that may be too long for some, but my point is only that that’s the
baseline and that redemptions alone do move us in the right direction relatively quickly. But
obviously some may wish to go more quickly than that. And of course, that doesn’t account for
the need to swap around MBS, Treasuries, and so on to get the composition right.
The other observation I had that I found useful in thinking about this is that it’s important
for us to keep in mind that, in a policy sense, the sales and redemptions of assets and the
movements in the interest paid on reserves are substitutes. To the extent that you do more of
one, you have to do less of the other, and as we discuss these policy tools, I think it is important
that we not treat them in some sense as independent; they are part of a unified process.
With those preliminary observations, I see President Bullard is first, and we can begin our
go-round.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I will try to be provocative. I am
moderately worried about the Committee’s approach to exit strategy so far. Let me give you one
of the main ideas I’m going to expound on here and then I will go into the rest of my remarks.
I am concerned about the moment in the exit strategy when we plan to potentially drain
very substantial amounts of reserves and simultaneously raise rates. This part seems risky to me
because two types of accommodation are being removed at the same time, and, combined with
negative economic developments, that could send the economy back into recession right at that
juncture. I see that as a possible policy mistake. I’m going to call that the 1937 scenario, and
my comments are directed toward getting something a little more continuous, prudent, and
potentially reversible as the baseline exit strategy.
April 26–27, 2011
30 of 244
Accordingly, I’m going to recommend a version of option 2 from the English–Nelson–
Sack memo. I’ll give you a defense of the LIFO policy, the last in–first out policy, in my
remarks here. I would probably put less emphasis on quickly normalizing the balance sheet than
the memo does. The speed, in my view, should be dictated by economic events, not an artificial
desire to get back to normal. I have one background remark before I give you my defense of the
LIFO policy, and that is that I think QE2 was quite successful by conventional metrics on
monetary policy easing. I think any reading of financial market developments since last fall
would tell you that real interest rates on safe assets declined, expected inflation increased
according to TIPS markets, the dollar depreciated fairly substantially, and equity markets rallied
fairly substantially. That’s about as classic as you can get in this business for what is supposed
to happen around the time of monetary policy easing. I think QE2 was quite successful in that
sense, and it is very apparent if you listen to financial markets. I think it helped us considerably
in avoiding a scenario like the one observed in Japan over the last 15 years, and now we are
somewhat beyond that point.
Now, you might ask, “Why was it successful? How did it work?” I think probably the
best explanation of that is that the large balance sheet is a way for the Committee to threaten
higher inflation with some probability. With policy rates near zero, higher expected inflation
drives real interest rates lower and has all the effects that I just described. This has the same net
effect as conventional monetary policy—that is, interest rate targeting. Because the policy had
important financial market effects, reversing the policy will undo some of those effects, and I
think that we have to be very cognizant of that. We want to be careful, therefore, in reducing the
size of the balance sheet, and we want to do it in a prudent way.
April 26–27, 2011
31 of 244
Let me give you the defense of the LIFO policy: last in, first out. I think this policy has
five important attributes, which I’m going to discuss here in turn. One is simplicity. You’re just
turning around and starting to go back on the same path that got you to this point. I think that’s
very easy for everyone to understand and very easy to communicate, so I like the simplicity of
the policy. I think it has better reversibility properties. It’s easier to pause or even reverse
course if necessary, and I’ll talk about that. The economy doesn’t always cooperate with our
best-laid plans. I think it’s prudent. As I described, the effects of QE have been pretty
substantial. It doesn’t really come through in our models in the way it seemed to in reality, so I
think we should be very careful about removing accommodation along this line. It’s
complementary to the future use of IOER and the federal funds rate. You’re setting up a
situation where you have a lower level of reserves in the system. That’s going to help us going
forward. And finally, it is politically alert. It avoids unnecessary overreliance on the IOER and
the criticism that will naturally flow to the Fed from the overreliance on that mechanism.
Let me take each of these in turn. First, simplicity. The last easing action we took was to
build up the balance sheet. The first natural step toward removing accommodation would be to
reverse that. I think that’s very easy to explain and easy to understand in the context of the most
recent FOMC policy actions. When we think about previous tightening cycles, of course, we
didn’t have this balance sheet policy out there, but now that we do, I think this is the most natural
way to proceed. Other sequencing, in my view, is arguably far more complicated and more
convoluted to try to explain, for example, why you are going to do step 1 versus step 4. I think
allowing balance sheet runoff is an example of this simplicity. It is a very easy thing to do; it
reverses a policy change that we made in August. However, I do have one complaint about that
aspect, which is that the autopilot route is not optimal under almost any analysis I’m aware of.
April 26–27, 2011
32 of 244
It’s a bureaucratic response. I can imagine that we might do it to get to a compromise policy on
the Committee, but I do not think we should use that as an excuse for not following what would
be the optimal strategy.
The second attribute that I said was useful is this reversibility aspect. Unfortunately, the
economy does not always cooperate with our best-laid plans, and I think this normalization
process, if we can get started on it, will take a long time because we’ve got an ultra-easy policy.
It’s going to take quite a while. There are going to be moments during that process when
negative shocks hit the economy, and we are going to have to be ready and able to adjust in that
circumstance. So the process of reducing the balance sheet through asset sales can proceed at a
faster or slower pace as needed. You can go on pause or even increase the balance sheet—you
have some flexibility there—and it’s reversible if necessary. Again, I think the reason why this
policy worked is that it is a way to threaten higher inflation, get higher inflation expectations,
and lower real rates in a zero nominal interest rate environment. Draining the reserves all at one
time takes that threat away all at once, plus you would increase interest rates. So that would be
one view of option 1, and at that point, that sounds a little discontinuous to me and possibly a
policy mistake à la 1937. Instead, I would gradually remove the threat of higher inflation by
gradually reducing the balance sheet at a pace dictated by events, and then at some point,
probably when reserve levels are lower, we will still have to drain the remaining reserves and
raise the IOER and the federal funds rate. But we can do that when reserve levels are lower and
not when they are at really high levels, as they are today.
The third aspect, I think, is that it’s a prudent policy. Again, our baseline models,
Tealbook and otherwise, are not well equipped to analyze the current situation. We have little
experience here and little historical data on which to base that analysis. We do the best we can,
April 26–27, 2011
33 of 244
but I do not think we should rely too heavily on these models to make policy decisions at this
juncture. Again, QE2 had substantial effects—take some of that back slowly, keeping inflation
and expected inflation close to target.
The fourth attribute is that it is a complementary policy to eventually raising interest
rates. Every step along the path of reducing reserves at a pace that respects developments in the
economy brings us closer to the normalization of monetary policy that we eventually want to get
to.
Finally, the LIFO policy is politically alert. LIFO avoids the unnecessary overreliance on
the interest rate on excess reserves. I think a policy of very large reserve balances at large banks,
combined with higher IOER, will unfortunately be viewed very negatively across the political
spectrum. It is an explosive issue for this Committee: more money to the banks. You’re forcing
them to hold reserves, then you’re paying them more on it.
Obviously, I don’t care what people think very much. If it was an optimal policy, then
we can and should defend it and we should just say that’s the optimal policy. But I think it’s not
the optimal policy, and it’s unnecessary to exit in that particular way. And, therefore, that policy
will be difficult to defend. People will be able to say—legitimately, I think—“There are other
ways to do this. You didn’t have to do it this way.” So, I think it is better to at least begin to
reduce reserves via asset sales before we get to the point where we have to pay substantial
interest on whatever reserves are remaining. This LIFO idea is simple, reversible if needed,
prudent, complementary to the eventual raising of the federal funds rate, and politically alert.
I’m looking forward to the discussion today. I think it will be important, a great
discussion. We probably cannot solve everything at a meeting like this, and in any case, no
April 26–27, 2011
34 of 244
matter what we decide or think we decide, we will probably have to remain flexible down the
line.
Let me come to the questions that were asked by the Chairman that will be easy to
answer here. As a first step, should we stop the reinvestment policy? I would say to that, okay,
but again, autopilot is not optimal.
Should we actively manage the balance sheet? I have been a proponent of that for a long
time, so the answer there is yes.
Should we sell assets before raising the federal funds rate? I think the answer to that is
yes. That’s been the gist of my comments here, and again, I would let economic conditions
dictate the pace of sales.
And on four, which is a set of true–false–uncertain statements: Should we shrink the
SOMA to the size necessary to implement monetary policy on a lower reserve base? I think, yes,
we should do that. I think that is what normalization of monetary policy means for the United
States, and that’s how people will understand it. I think it facilitates an eventual transition to a
corridor system; at least my understanding of where many members of the Committee are is that
we eventually want to be in a corridor system.
Do we want an all-Treasuries portfolio? I say yes to that. And should we adjust sales in
response to economic events? I would say yes to that, too.
So that’s my insertion of a speech defending the asset-sales-first policy. Thank you, Mr.
Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Bullard, I do have a question about
this, which would be very helpful if you would address—one issue about this is the speed. Is
there a speed limit? If we think that, say, $200 billion of sales is equal to 25 basis points—to
April 26–27, 2011
35 of 244
take a rough example—then if we were doing 25 and 50 basis point equivalent moves, that might
require a very rapid disposition of assets. So, A, there’s the market absorbency issue, but, B, you
talked about politics. If we were to sell assets that quickly, we would be, I think, more likely to
suffer capital losses, which are also not attractive politically. Do you have any concerns about
any speed issues on this approach?
MR. BULLARD. On the capital losses issue, I think we have repeatedly and effectively
said that we don’t make policy here based on capital gains or losses. So I think we have been
pretty effective on that, and we can defend that part.
On the speed issue, I think, again, you have this large balance sheet because this is a way
to threaten higher inflation in an environment in which you have zero policy rates, and you can
reduce it at a pace that keeps inflation and inflation expectations close to target. So it seems as if
that could be dictated by events. If you can go faster, you can go faster. I appreciate that there
might also be considerations about absorption. And, again, even if you aggressively followed
my kind of policy, I think you would get to some point where you said, “Okay. We’re going to
have to drain the remaining reserves and start to move the funds rate up because it’s just not
enough.”
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Hoenig.
MR. HOENIG. Can I ask President Bullard a question? As you’re describing your
strategy, you’re selling out of the portfolio. Is that what you’re saying?
MR. BULLARD. Yes.
MR. HOENIG. And that would have effects, but you wouldn’t actually change the fed
funds rate or the interest on reserves—for how long?
April 26–27, 2011
36 of 244
MR. BULLARD. Well, it would be a version of option 2, so I’d wait as long as I could, I
suppose.
MR. HOENIG. And conditions would tell you when to make that move—in terms of
what? Inflationary expectations, events, and so forth?
MR. BULLARD. I’d definitely keep an eye on inflation and inflation expectations. It is
possible you could start reducing the balance sheet and you’re really not getting enough bang for
your buck out of that, and then you might say, “Okay, we’re going to have to drain reserves,”
and bring out the big gun and raise the funds rate.
MR. HOENIG. Thank you. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Can you repeat? You used a tradeoff number—I just want to make sure
I have it right—that a certain number of billion dollars is equivalent to a certain number of basis
points. Was that of the fed funds rate’s worth of easing?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. The staff can correct me. I believe we’ve viewed
$150 billion to $200 billion of securities in our portfolio as being roughly equivalent to 25 basis
points. Is that about right?
MR. ENGLISH. We were saying that the $600 billion purchase program was roughly
like a 75 basis point reduction.
MR. LACKER. Does it mean if we sold $1.6 trillion it would be like having a 4 percent
fed funds rate, leaving the IOR rate at 25 basis points?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. You’d be going from minus 4 to 24 basis points.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. We currently have about 200 basis points’ worth of ease
coming from securities, according to the staff assessment.
April 26–27, 2011
37 of 244
MR. LACKER. Attributable to?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Attributable to our excess holdings of securities.
MR. LACKER. Right. I’m just doing the math. If we got down to $1 trillion on the
balance sheet, if we sold all our assets, that would be the equivalent of 4 percentage points?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Two percentage points.
MR. LACKER. But the market wouldn’t work the same, right?
MR. ENGLISH. All of these are approximations.
MR. BULLARD. Mr. Chairman, could I make a comment on that issue? Again, I don’t
think our models are a great guide in this kind of environment. So I think what you should do is
experiment with it and then see, in particular, where inflation and inflation expectations go and
that would help dictate the pace.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I want to thank the staff for their memos on
exit and monetary policy implementation frameworks. I think they hit on most of the important
issues that we need to grapple with as we formulate a strategy.
In my view, I think our strategy needs three basic principles. First, I think we need to
articulate a plan to the public telling them what monetary policy framework we are normalizing
to, then offer them a plan about how to get there. Second, the plan should be systematic to the
extent it’s possible, entailing some degree of commitment to the way we’ll execute the strategy.
This will also reduce uncertainty in the marketplace. And third, it should allow for some
conditionality on the evolution of economic and financial conditions. Like always, our policy
should be state-contingent.
April 26–27, 2011
38 of 244
I am in strong support of the corridor system over the floor system as our normal
operating framework, although I recognize that we will need to operate on something like a floor
system for some time as we exit, given the size of our balance sheet. In my view, the political
risks of operating a policy with a very large balance sheet, of potentially unlimited size, are just
too great. The floor system makes our balance sheet largely a new discretionary instrument, yet
we have almost no theory on how we use this new tool, except perhaps at the zero bound.
How big is too big? What criteria will we use to decide the size of our balance sheet?
Without some constraints imposed on the size and uses of the balance sheet, we will find many
ideas proffered from all over government as to how we should use it to someone’s advantage,
whether it be to reduce government debt or to be a development bank for some grand industrial
or infrastructure policy. I think these risks overwhelm any efficiency gains one could posit that
are associated with the floor system. Besides, the corridor system likely captures the biggest
portion of the efficiency gains, so the marginal benefits of going to a floor system, I think, are
relatively small.
The background memo suggests that we don’t need to decide now whether to use a
corridor versus floor system, because we will learn along the way about the calibration between
the IOER and the funds rate. True, but this doesn’t address my concerns. There will be learning,
but I think we need to know where we’re headed and to convey that to the public if we are to
develop an appropriate strategy because, as Bill said, it may affect the pace of sales you choose
and other aspects of your exit strategy. Moreover, clearly signaling that we will be shrinking our
balance sheet to a more normal size would help anchor expectations of inflation by reassuring
the public that we will not let our large balance sheet lead to higher inflation. If we are to
prevent our balance sheet from creating unacceptable inflation down the road, we will have to
April 26–27, 2011
39 of 244
sell assets maybe at a pace more rapidly than some would prefer at this point. Thus, one of the
aspects that we need to communicate is that we will need to be able to signal to the market that
we are prepared to do just that. In the early stages of this crisis, we talked about the speed at
which we cut rates and adjusted policy, and we also talked about the chances that on exit, we
may have to be just as aggressive coming out as we were going in. And we need to make sure
the public understands that we are prepared to do that, if necessary.
Getting to a corridor system will require us to shrink our balance sheet within a
reasonable time frame and will require asset sales. If our goal is to return to an all-Treasuries
portfolio, we will need to sell MBS. In general, I believe we should aim to sell assets fairly
quickly but without disrupting the market. We have argued all along that the effect of asset
purchases is through stock effects, not flow effects; thus, I don’t think selling assets will be that
disruptive, nor do I see why there seems to be so much concern about a moderate pace of sales
similar to the pace at which we purchased those assets. Moreover, holding on to assets, which
are a good source of collateral in the financial markets, when there is an appetite and a growing
economy for these types of assets in the marketplace could be more distortionary than supplying
that collateral.
Finally, I think that the pace of sales should vary with economic conditions—that is, it
should be state-contingent. Now, I offered one such suggestion on how to do that in my exit
strategy memo—namely, because the public generally understands how our interest rate
decisions reflect the outlook for inflation and growth, we could tie our sales to the interest rate
changes. Let me clarify that I am not suggesting that we use asset sales as a separate policy
instrument, as the staff memo seems to suggest; I believe we should rely on the interest rate as
our primary policy instrument. Instead, I want our sales pace to be responsive to economic
April 26–27, 2011
40 of 244
conditions. Tying the volume of sales to changes in interest rates is just one way of doing that.
Actually, the way I think about it, such a strategy eliminates asset sales as a separate
discretionary policy tool, as the sales are triggered by the same criteria as our interest rate
decisions. If economic conditions are such that we want to raise our policy interest rate, then we
should be able to speed up our asset sales, because in such cases economic growth would be
stronger and inflation likely to be rising. Once the balance sheet is normalized, we have full
control over the funds rate, and, obviously, the sales program would come to a halt. I also think
that the alternative of separating these tools and using them independently is dangerous. It risks
having either the interest rate instrument or the balance sheet getting behind the curve in our exit
strategy.
I think we have less confidence in exactly the effect on market conditions and interest
rates from our asset sales than we do about the effect of interest rates, so the degree of tightening
we are likely to be achieving with asset sales is highly uncertain at this point. Now, others might
prefer a different method of achieving a state-contingent policy. That’s fine, so long as we
articulate what criteria we will be using for determining that pace of sales. But leaving sales to
be a wholly discretionary decision only adds uncertainty and confusion to the marketplace. And
making the sales completely unresponsive to the economy by putting them on some
predetermined path is likely, as President Bullard suggested, not to be optimal, and it may not
even be very credible. Or if the economy was likely to weaken, this Committee would most
likely choose to slow the pace of sales if they thought that was necessary.
We justified the first round of asset purchases as credit easing to help stabilize fragile
financial markets. Financial markets are no longer fragile. Hence, we should begin unwinding
April 26–27, 2011
41 of 244
these purchases and explain that we are doing so not as a tightening move, but as a move toward
normalcy as markets return to normalcy.
Let me summarize by highlighting the questions that were submitted in the memo. On
question 1 regarding investments, I do think that the natural first step in exit would be to stop
reinvestments of both agencies and Treasuries. The natural time to do that is in June when the
LSAP2 is completed. I note that the Chairman will have another press briefing in June, and that
will give him the opportunity to fully explain what we are doing and add commentary.
On question 2, regarding whether asset sales should be on a predetermined or
preannounced path or actively varied with response to the economic outlook, I do think we need
to announce a plan so the public understands where we are headed and how to get there. I also
think we should vary the pace of sales with market conditions. My guess is that we will do that
anyway. Therefore, we should explain to the public the criteria that we’ll be using. The idea of
tying it to interest rate decisions simply says we are using the same decision for asset sales and
interest rate decisions. If you really believe they are substitutes, you could do them together. If
you really wanted to calibrate the difference, you could raise interest rates at a little lesser pace
and sell assets at a more rapid pace to get the same effect. I’m not as confident that we can
calibrate it that carefully, but you certainly could do that.
Regarding the sequencing of actions in question 3, I would not be in favor of delaying
liftoff of the funds rate in favor of asset decisions. I think we should sell assets and raise them
concurrently. The policy rate will remain our instrument of monetary policy even if, practically,
it is the IOER for a while. In my memo, asset sales would simply be a byproduct of the decision,
not an independent decision. The point of asset sales is to return our balance sheet to a more
normal size and composition so that we can run a corridor system.
April 26–27, 2011
42 of 244
Finally, question 4—I agree with all the points. We should shrink the SOMA portfolio to
the size necessary to implement our monetary policy framework. I think the framework should
be a corridor system. We should return to an all-Treasuries portfolio, which means we will need
to sell agency securities. We should be transparent and communicate our exit plan, including
how our asset sales will be adjusted in response to changes in economic conditions. Thank you,
Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Plosser, I think you did answer this
question, but just so I understand it: If you’re tying interest rates and asset sales, suppose the
Taylor rule says interest rates have to rise by 25 basis points. Presumably, you would then
actually raise it by 12½ basis points, and then—
MR. PLOSSER. Well, again, that’s where I was talking about the calibration. If we
were comfortable enough with the calibration, you could choose to split the difference, if you
will. I don’t know that I’m as confident about that calibration, but I would be open to discussing
that. The key, I think, is that we tie the two together, so that they’re not two independent
decisions that we are making in some way; that’s what I was trying to get at.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I found the staff memos
immensely helpful, and I thank the staff for their work on them.
Exit has two components, timing and sequencing, and I will focus my remarks in this goround on the issue of sequencing. Timing, of course, is critical, but I will have more to say about
that in the later go-rounds.
In general, as my own memo suggested, I like the sequencing in option 1. With that said,
I will describe three ways in which I think option 1 in the staff memo could be improved. I will
April 26–27, 2011
43 of 244
answer the four questions and then close with a comment about the FOMC statements that the
staff proposed for use in connection with exit.
Option 1 in the staff memo has four steps that take place over 15 months: step 1, end
reinvestment; step 2, three months later, drop “extended period” language and begin reserve
draining; step 3, six months after that, raise the fed funds rate; and step 4, six months after that,
increase the fed funds rate and begin a gradual process of asset sales.
I would make three changes to this plan. First, I want to continue to reinvest payments
received from MBS, because one of the things I felt I learned in 2010 was that failing to reinvest
MBS payments is a way to generate pro-cyclical monetary accommodation. More specifically,
when conditions weaken and long rates decline, people prepay their mortgages; a policy of MBS
redemption then implies a fast withdrawal of accommodation, exactly what we don’t want when
conditions weaken. This is a poor paraphrase, I think, of words that Vice Chairman Dudley
uttered last August. Hence, when we end reinvestments, we should do so only for Treasuries.
Second, I don’t see the need to begin redemptions before dropping the “extended period”
language. We will still need to drain reserves before raising the fed funds rate. Ending
reinvestments three months earlier than dropping the “extended period” language will have little
intrinsic macroeconomic impact, and I think that it is going to introduce lots of uncertainties into
the minds of market participants. What I would be willing to do is to combine what I called
steps 1 and 2 of option 1—that is, do three things at once, which is to drop the “extended period”
language, begin reserve draining, and end reinvestments of Treasuries all at one time. The staff’s
plan defers sales until six months after the increase in the fed funds rate. That deferral is okay
with me, but I have to say that I don’t really see the sharp economic distinction between
April 26–27, 2011
44 of 244
redemptions and sales. So I would also be willing to start selling MBS and Treasuries
simultaneously with ending reinvestments.
Third, as written, option 1 puts six months between dropping the “extended period”
language and raising rates. I’m not sure why six months is the right length of time. This was the
context of my discussion with Brian and Bill earlier about how much time we really need to be
thinking about reserve draining. That’s the operational gap that I think we have to contemplate,
but basically I would consider a two- to four-meeting gap, so three to six months, as being a
more appropriate interpretation of the term “extended period.” And I think we could do a
reasonable amount of reserve draining in that time frame as well.
Those are my three changes. I want to continue reinvesting payments from MBS. I
would not use ending reinvestment as my first step. I would, instead, combine that with
dropping the “extended period” language and beginning reserve draining. And the final thing is
that I think we don’t have to wait six months between dropping the “extended period” language
and raising rates. I think three to six months is probably a more appropriate interpretation.
Let me turn to the questions. I have answered a lot of them already, but I’ll go through
them anyway. As I said earlier, I would not use redemptions as the first step; the first step
should be to drop the “extended period” language and simultaneously begin reserve draining.
Redemptions could take place at the same time as that. As indicated, I would want to continue to
reinvest MBS proceeds into Treasuries.
I like a slow, largely predetermined path of sales. I agree with President Plosser and Bill
that asset sales and fed funds rate increases are largely substitutable ways of affecting the
economy. And I think that our economic understanding of the impact of asset sales on the
economy is pretty much in its infancy, so I would not use something we don’t have such a good
April 26–27, 2011
45 of 244
understanding of as an active tool of policy. We needed to use asset purchases because the fed
funds rate was at zero, but we can always reduce accommodation by raising the fed funds rate. If
the fed funds rate were to hit zero again—as President Bullard points out, negative shocks could
hit us in the midst of what we consider our exit strategy—we may need to slow or reverse the
path of sales if the deterioration in economic conditions were sufficiently severe.
My answer to question 3—I’ve used sales and redemptions as basically substitutable
ways to reduce the size of the balance sheet. I don’t think that balance sheet reduction should
begin before you remove the “extended period” language from the statement. Other than that, I
don’t have strong views as to when we start. As long as the staff is confident in the efficacy of
reserve draining—and I hope we will be able to build that confidence—sales and redemptions
can begin after raising the fed funds rate. I don’t see why we need to wait six months, but I’m
also happy to do so.
Okay. On question 4, the true–false–uncertain choices, I think I’ve got “true” on all of
these. I realize, of course, there was no right answer to this question, but—[laughter]
MR. PLOSSER. What really matters is your explanation, Narayana.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. I’m going to be terse on these. In terms of 4a, I agree with the
statement. Consistent with the view expressed in 4a, I prefer a corridor system to a floor system,
ultimately. There are definitely some economic benefits to the floor system, which research
around the System has pointed to, but all in all, I think the benefits are outweighed by its relative
unfamiliarity. I agree with the statement in 4b as well, and I agree with the statement in 4c,
except that I always want to be thinking about asset sales and redemptions as being a bundle, a
way of reducing the balance sheet as one, so I would talk about asset sales and redemptions
being implemented within a framework.
April 26–27, 2011
46 of 244
Let me close by saying a word about the suggested FOMC statement about raising the fed
funds rate target. This is on page 16 of the exit strategy memo. These are certainly early days to
be talking about this kind of stuff, but there are some subtle governance issues we are going to be
facing as we move into our exit strategy here. The suggested statement includes a reference to
the Board of Governors’ action on interest on reserves. I think including the Board of
Governors’ action in the FOMC statement is confusing and potentially problematic from a
governance point of view. I would, instead, make the FOMC statement about the FOMC’s
actions. The Board of Governors can release a separate statement, presumably at the same time,
that could read, “Consistent with the FOMC’s change in its target for the fed funds rate, the
Board of Governors voted to change the interest rate on reserves to be” whatever it is. Thank
you, Mr. Chairman.
MR. ENGLISH. Well, our intention here was to follow what was done in the past when
there were changes in the discount rate and we were aligning the discount rate with changes in
the fed funds target. We had the FOMC statement and then, at the very bottom of the press
release, there were a couple of sentences saying that the Board of Governors had moved the
discount rate. So we were not aiming to do anything new here—just what we thought was the
standard procedure.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. I guess what I’m thinking is, maybe we should be doing
something new, given the novelty of the situation. That’s all I’m suggesting.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. Yes. This is a question both to you, Mr. Chairman, and Narayana. If
we think about sales and the IOER–federal funds rate as substitutes, let’s suppose the Taylor rule
says that the funds rate ought to be 2 percent. Assuming that these are really substitutes, if we
April 26–27, 2011
47 of 244
haven’t sold assets—and let’s just say there’s 200 basis points of ease within the portfolio—that
means we need to set the IOER at 4 percent. That means if we don’t sell, we are going to have to
be raising rates faster than we might otherwise choose to do in that environment. Am I
understanding that correctly?
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. That is a correct interpretation of what “perfect substitutes”
would mean.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. That is right.
MR. PLOSSER. Whew, I’m glad I passed that test. [Laughter]
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. And by the same token, if you sell, then you can delay the
increase in the fund rate. I would point out, just as a factual matter, that if we begin a
redemptions process in December of this year, for example, that 200 basis points is going to
shrink away pretty quickly.
MR. PLOSSER. Well, over four years, right?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. No. I asked the staff to look at this, and because of the
anticipation of a declining balance sheet, even though they estimate that there is a 200 basis point
effect as of the fourth quarter of 2010, by the fourth quarter of 2012—that is, a year and a half
from now—that would be down to 70 basis points just from redemptions. So that part will get
smaller over time, even if we just do redemptions. And part of that is because it depends not just
on the size, but on the expected path of sales.
MR. PLOSSER. Okay.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Are we ready for President Fisher? President Fisher.
MR. FISHER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. You asked for some principles. The
principles, or desiderata, that I would suggest before going into the questions are, first, we wish
April 26–27, 2011
48 of 244
to normalize the conduct of monetary policy as quickly as economic conditions allow. To me,
that means returning to a system of an active funds market in which the funds rate is the principal
instrument of monetary policy.
A second principle would be an obvious one but I think needs to be restated—that we
support growth in real activity while guarding against both deflation and excess inflation. To
me, that means getting the monetary base back on an approximate 5 percent pre-crisis growth
path within a reasonable time—say, three to five years.
The third would be to stop distorting the allocation of capital in favor of housing. To me,
the faster we get out of MBS, the better. Shedding those holdings need not result in a rapid
shrinkage of our balance sheet. We can always reinvest some or all of the proceeds in
Treasuries, but I do believe that we must get away from that kind of asset allocation and social
engineering.
Fourth, this may be offensive, but I think we must shut the door, lock the key, and throw
it away from the principle that we are ever again going to proceed down the path of monetizing
the debt of our government.
And, fifth, we should seek to reduce our exposure to capital losses, but I think that any
good portfolio manager, particularly given the mix that we have, can balance that out. I don’t
accept the formal aspect of not worrying about capital losses because of whatever leeway we
have been granted by Treasury or other authorities. I think we are subject to political criticism
there. Part of my principles, or desiderata, would be to reduce our exposure to capital losses or
at least balance out the losses and gains. To me, that means probably reducing and moving away
from our long-term exposure as we proceed to sell assets.
April 26–27, 2011
49 of 244
And then, the sixth principle, which is very important to me, would be that we, in all our
decisionmaking, maintain the full power of the Federal Open Market Committee in making these
various decisions. So now let me turn to the questions that were asked.
With regard to the first—Should the first step be to stop the current policy of reinvesting
principal payments from agency securities?—the decision to reinvest principal payments was
motivated by having the funds rate at zero. To me, it’s a no-brainer that we would want to end
the reinvestment program as soon as the Committee was convinced that the time had come to
start normalizing policy, just as we have now decided or, I believe, will decide—we will see
what the policy round indicates—to stop QE2 expansion. I call the principle the “stop digging”
principle, and to me I would stop digging at least in terms of mortgage-backed securities as soon
as we have the leeway to do so.
In terms of the second question about removing policy accommodation—Would we
prefer to put asset sales on a largely predetermined or preannounced path?—I think I have heard
my previous interlocutors reference this, but to me the “prudent man” principle applies here. We
have never been in a situation like the one we find ourselves in now. You could detect that in the
little mini debate or discussion between Bill English and Brian in response to the question of Mr.
Hoenig. I think we need to retain as much flexibility as possible to respond to unforeseen or
unforeseeable developments as we get back to normal. I do believe some forward guidance
would be important. I think President Plosser’s proposal is a good attempt to suggest some
forward guidance, but we’ve got to make sure we don’t put ourselves in a straitjacket, and not be
carried away with confidence about rational expectations or efficient markets. There are some
competing needs here. I think we need to allow maximum flexibility.
April 26–27, 2011
50 of 244
With regard to the third question about sequencing actions to remove accommodation,
and whether we would sell assets before or after or at the same time, I would again suggest that
we maintain as much flexibility as possible. I am very sympathetic to President Bullard’s
argument for LIFO accounting. It is eminently sensible, but, again, maintain flexibility. One
advantage of cleaning out the balance sheet before raising rates is that it would at least
potentially eliminate the issue of whether the funds rate or the IOER becomes the main policy
instrument. I feel strongly that a channel system is preferable, with the funds rate being the main
policy instrument and the IOER being some distance below that in normal conditions. But, in
my opinion, as long as we have trillions of dollars in excess reserves sloshing around the banking
system, the funds rate and the IOER are going to have to move pretty much in lockstep with one
another, with the IOER being the real determinant of a bank’s willingness to lend out reserves. I
am not so sure about the real practicability of the massive use of reverse repos and term deposits
to prevent excess reserves from spilling out into the broader economy. I know we’ve tested
those channels, but, given the newness of those instruments, Brian, one might wonder whether
they can be used on a scale sufficient to control the excess liquidity that is out there. A middle
course of raising the funds rate, IOER, and selling assets all at the same time is probably the best
course of action. I think we will have to feel the market to see which is the most effective.
With regard to the statements in the fourth question, the answer is yes, yes, and yes to the
first three. With regard to the fourth, about asset sales being communicated to the public in
advance, again, I want to be careful we don’t put ourselves in a straitjacket. As a former
portfolio manager, I would want to maintain as much flexibility as possible. The answer, really,
comes down to where I started this discussion or where others have raised the question: What
are we trying to get to? What is the purpose of our normalization? I would want to make sure
April 26–27, 2011
51 of 244
that we don’t put the words before the subject. If we determine the res, the reason for what
we’re going to do, then it might be more easy to communicate what we intend. But, again,
maintain the flexibility. Do not place us in a straitjacket. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Williams.
MR. WILLIAMS. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I, too, would like to commend the staff on
their memo. It was very helpful in thinking about many of the practical issues involved in
implementing an exit strategy. I think these are very difficult issues. I have been listening to
each person who has gone before me, and I completely agree with the importance of flexibility
and with the principles that should be guiding the policy. Many of the thoughts that people have
already expressed I agree with, although I come to slightly different conclusions. I am actually,
in the end, going to be closer to President Kocherlakota in my views, but I think these are very
fine differences, and these are just difficult issues in terms of communication. I think we have to
recognize that going forward.
In approaching the questions, I too found it useful to focus on what I thought of as the
underlying principles of what we’re aiming to do. To me, the most important consideration in
designing our exit strategy is to get the timing right in terms of the macroeconomic objectives
that we have. Obviously, we have the long-run objective of normalizing our balance sheet. But
in terms of the details of sequencing, I think that saying when to begin redemptions or drain
reserves or exactly how this is structured should not obscure or hinder our pursuit of the
appropriate policy stance.
Now, in thinking about the different choices, I think the evidence shows that the effects
of the LSAPs depend on the expectations of the future size and composition of our balance sheet.
That’s where I start from in terms of thinking about how this works. I view reducing the size of
April 26–27, 2011
52 of 244
our balance sheet as working through the same basic channels on the economy as increases in the
funds rate, and I see these as being substitutes in terms of the macroeconomy. I also agree with
President Kocherlakota’s point that both redemptions and sales affect the size of our balance
sheet, and I tend to think of those together as opposed to separately. However, there are some
critical differences that make these instruments imperfect substitutes in practice. They have
already been mentioned. I’ll briefly go through two of them. Although our recent experience
has provided us with a much better understanding of the effects of the LSAPs than we had just a
few years ago, there is still a great deal of uncertainty around these effects. I think the
uncertainties about the effects of changing LSAPs far exceed those of comparable movements in
the fed funds rate, and this high degree of uncertainty suggests, per the Brainard conservatism
principle, that we should follow a cautious and gradual approach to changing the balance sheet
going forward.
Second, compared with the fed funds rate, the public still has limited experience and
understanding regarding the use of the balance sheet as a policy instrument. This suggests that
an active use of the balance sheet, as suggested in option 2, would face greater communication
challenges and risks of confusing markets, compared with using the funds rate as our principal
policy instrument. These considerations, along with the operational constraints, in terms of the
maximum size of asset sales, argue for a steady path of reducing our balance sheet that is
preannounced and well communicated. I don’t like the word “deterministic” because it
obviously could change in response to conditions. But there should be a relatively high hurdle to
modifying the path. I think this approach leaves the fed funds rate as a primary instrument of
adjusting the stance of policy either up or down in response to change in economic conditions.
April 26–27, 2011
53 of 244
This brings me to another consideration in sequencing the exit strategy: the fact that the
short rate is currently constrained by the zero lower bound. To me, this argues for holding off on
shrinking our balance sheet until the short rate is well away from the zero bound so that we have
the needed flexibility to add accommodation through a rate cut if economic conditions warrant.
Again, I’m thinking that the fed funds rate is the primary instrument that you move up and down
in response to a change in conditions. So, in this way, I think I would prefer to begin the process
of shrinking the balance sheet, both in terms of redemptions and in terms of sales, only after we
have instituted a few rate hikes, as envisioned in option 1.
Let me go through the specific questions quickly. On number 1, again, I’ve viewed
redemptions in the same way as asset sales, so I would actually prefer to hold off on any
reinvestments until after we raise the funds rate. On number 2, I prefer a path of asset sales that
is preannounced and well communicated. And on 3, my view is that we want to lift off the zero
lower bound first in order to regain the flexibility to use that instrument as appropriate before we
begin asset sales. On number 4, I thought that was an apple pie question, and I’m all for apple
pie, so I agree with all of the statements in number 4. [Laughter] I am in favor of eventually
returning to an all-Treasuries portfolio with a corridor operating framework. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Just for my notes, you said to begin the redemption process
after raising rates.
MR. WILLIAMS. And basically thinking of it symmetrically with asset sales.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. It’s 12:30 p.m. I understand that lunch is ready.
Why don’t we recess until 1:00 p.m., bring our lunch back here, and we will still be eating at
1:00, but we’ll just recommence the meeting at that point. Okay? Thank you.
[Lunch break]
April 26–27, 2011
54 of 244
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Why don’t we recommence our meeting? We will
continue with President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. My preferred strategy for removing policy
accommodation, like several others of you, would involve using the funds rate target supported
by movements in the interest rate on reserves as the primary instrument of monetary policy. I
think asset sales should begin quickly, and I’d advocate that they should proceed at a pace that’s
significantly more rapid than any of the options shown in the staff’s memo. I think that at
approximately the rate at which we purchased assets is a good benchmark. The pace of sales
should be more or less predetermined, and while we should reserve the right to alter the pace in
light of incoming information, I think as President Williams said, the bar for such alterations
should be set on the high side. I’ll explain my preferences before I touch on the four “Exodus”
questions.
Our asset purchase program was designed to address problems in credit markets and to
ease monetary policy, with short-term interest rates at their lower bound. Credit markets seem to
be functioning reasonably well right now, and the zero bound doesn’t interfere with using
interest rates to remove policy accommodation.
The arguments for using asset holdings as a policy tool, thus, aren’t symmetric, and they
have less force when interest rates are rising. So for me, our large-scale asset sales program—
and I’m assuming we’re going to refer to this as the LSAS?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. You heard it here first. [Laughter]
MR. LACKER. For me, the LSAS should be designed primarily to return our portfolio to
normal as rapidly as possible and to help facilitate, as best we can engineer it, the use of the
April 26–27, 2011
55 of 244
federal funds rate target as a policy instrument, and not to use our sales program to make shortterm, contingent adjustments to monetary conditions.
Now, it is true that heroic work has been done by the New York Fed staff and others as
well to try to estimate the term structure effects of LSAPs, but I think we should be careful not to
place too much weight on those estimates. They’re not very precise, and the identification
assumptions are open to serious questions. As a result, I don’t think they provide a really strong,
reliable basis for using the LSAS as a substitute for interest rate policy or constructing a policy
menu in which asset sales trade off against interest rate increases.
As I said, I think asset sales should occur at a relatively rapid pace—specifically, about
the same pace at which we purchased assets, around $100 billion a month. I see several reasons
for doing so. First, I haven’t heard any objections or any convincing stories or theories or
evidence about how a well-communicated program of sales would impede market efficiency. I
am sure that the more rapidly we sell things, the more rapidly prices might fall or adjust, but I
think we’ve all come around to the stock view rather than the flow view. Price effects, I think,
are separate from the efficiency effects that I was discussing with the System Open Market
Account Manager earlier.
Second, I see high levels of reserve balances as exacerbating the uncertainty about the
effects of our policy rate on the economy, and this is evident in the Desk survey. It showed
significantly more variation in what the average view of the spread would be with high balances
than with low balances, and I would assume that the uncertainty around those estimates is larger
for high balances than for low balances as well. I think high reserve balances are likely to push
down other interest rates relative to the interest rate on reserves, and as the Manager said, the
zero bound undoubtedly limits that effect; I don’t think we have a good sense of just how strong
April 26–27, 2011
56 of 244
that limiting effect is. So it seems likely that the magnitude of the effect of high reserve balances
on other rates relative to the IOER is going to be different; it’s going to change as we increase
the interest rate on reserves. Related to policy uncertainty is that I think the high level of
reserves amplifies the ever-present risk associated with ex post policy mistakes. With
$1½ trillion of excess reserves, banks essentially have many months of rapid loan growth that’s
prefunded, and they could draw on that if they view lending opportunities as evolving more
favorably. Now, this would quickly become apparent, of course, but I don’t think we can rule
out the idea that inflation expectations would become unhinged simultaneously with an
explosion in lending.
Another reason I prefer a rapid pace of asset sales is to get us out of the credit allocation
business. This obviously has the most force with the MBS. Our MBS purchases were unique;
they were exceptional and motivated by an assessment that the functioning of those markets was
in some sense impaired. Whatever one’s view about that assessment of market functioning,
those unique and exceptional circumstances clearly have passed, and I think we should
acknowledge as much by selling those assets quickly. One way to drain reserves without having
to rapidly reduce our asset holdings is for us to issue our own short-term debt, and I want to
acknowledge the hard work the staff has done to design, build, and test systems for conducting
reverse repos and selling term deposits. But I think these are very unattractive tools, and I
strongly oppose using them. Issuing new short-term debt in order to reduce reserve balances and
in order to avoid having to sell longer-term debt to effect a similar reduction in reserve balances
constitutes a really excessive fine tuning of our intervention across the term structure. It sets the
precedent of essentially running a hedge fund, issuing—that is to say, shorting—some securities
in order to go long on some other securities. This is more credit allocation to the extent that we
April 26–27, 2011
57 of 244
use this to avoid having to sell MBS. And if it’s Treasuries we’re avoiding selling, this amounts
to offsetting the term structure of the debt issued by the Treasury. Either role strikes me as
fundamentally inappropriate for an independent central bank. We should issue monetary
liabilities funded by a broad, evenly weighted portfolio of Treasuries and leave it at that. I
understand that it’s possible market rates will not track the IOER closely if we raise interest rates
before asset sales have made much of a dent in the balance sheet, but if this occurs, let’s
accelerate asset sales rather than issue our own debt.
Let me briefly address the four questions. Should our first step be to stop reinvesting
MBS proceeds? I say yes.
Should we stop reinvesting Treasury proceeds? Here we’re asked to think about
reinvesting Treasury proceeds or not, and I prefer to think of this in terms of the size and
composition of our balance sheet. Given a path for the size of our balance sheet, how do we
want to achieve that? My preference is for a corner solution in which, for any given reduction in
asset holdings, we achieve it through MBS sales, and under that principle, the next step after
halting MBS reinvestments would be to sell MBS rather than stop reinvesting the Treasury
proceeds.
Should asset sales be predetermined or preannounced or highly contingent? As I’ve said,
and with due respect to others like President Plosser who have argued for a more contingent
approach, I would prefer a relatively predetermined pace. Of course, nothing we do is
predetermined, but I’d envision the funds rate being our main tool and there being a fairly high
bar for deviating from a preannounced pace of sales.
Should we start selling before or after we raise the funds rate? I’d prefer to move fairly
quickly in winding down our balance sheet. I think we ought to move quickly toward selling
April 26–27, 2011
58 of 244
assets along the LIFO lines that President Bullard and others have suggested and sell them at a
fairly rapid pace, barring some unforeseen dramatic worsening in the outlook.
So, question 4, do you agree with each of the following statements? Yes.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Pianalto.
MS. PIANALTO. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I also want to compliment the staff on the
background memos and an excellent summary of the options for the exit strategy. I found them
to be quite helpful.
As I look around the table, it appears, as individuals, we look like we’re in pretty good
shape, but our balance sheet has put on quite a few pounds. The staff has given us two paths to
weight loss, a gradual path of weaning us off second helpings and bad calories and a more
aggressive strategy of balance sheet bariatric surgery. [Laughter] Although we don’t have to
accept either one of these options in its entirety, I personally prefer option 1 largely as it is laid
out in the staff memo. I favored this option last year, and I still find it to be a framework that is
clear and reasonably simple to articulate.
I’d like our exit process to appear as familiar and understandable to the public as
possible, with the effects that we can reasonably predict from past experience. Therefore, I’d
like short-term interest rates to be our primary policy instrument.
Turning to the questions that were provided, in response to question 1 on sequencing our
actions to remove policy accommodation, I support beginning the exit process by halting
reinvestment of principal payments for agency and Treasury securities. I prefer to get to an
all-Treasuries balance sheet over time, which taken by itself would favor halting only the
reinvestment of agency securities. However, there are other issues to consider, and we could
shrink the balance sheet somewhat faster and explain our actions more simply and effectively in
April 26–27, 2011
59 of 244
this first phase by halting all reinvestments of both agencies and Treasuries. Next I would begin
to increase our fed funds rate target and the IOER.
In response to question 2, I would prefer to commence asset sales some time after we
begin to increase interest rates. I would sell agency debt and agency MBS over a five-year
period. I strongly prefer to sell them gradually and on a preannounced path. I think that a
preannounced path would help to minimize market concerns about surprise asset sales. That
approach would also reinforce a focus on short-term interest rates as our primary policy
instrument. I’m not in favor of tying asset sales to changes in the economic outlook unless the
outlook were to shift significantly. By putting our asset sales in the background, we can again
better focus the public on our adjustments to the fed funds rate and the IOER.
In response to the third question, as I said, I do prefer to sell assets some time after
increasing the fed funds rate. I don’t place a high priority on rapidly reducing the size of our
balance sheet. Instead, I envision us operating for some time with total reserve balances in
excess of what would be required in a mature interest rate–targeting framework, even though we
would be shrinking the balance sheet over the intermediate term through redemptions and
passive asset sales. As we shrink our balance sheet through asset sales, I would put greater
priority on reducing our holdings of agency securities than Treasuries. As the economy
strengthens and we renormalize policy, we should return to the bedrock principle of
Treasuries-only that we’ve followed in the past.
I agree with the statements listed under question 4. I would make one clarification to the
third statement because, as I said, I would adjust the pace of asset sales only if there’s a
significant change in the economic outlook. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Evans.
April 26–27, 2011
60 of 244
MR. EVANS. Thank you, Mr. Chairman, and thanks to the staff for a couple of very nice
memos, which were very helpful in thinking about these issues.
I find that I can’t completely separate my current assessment of appropriate monetary
policy in discussing the exit strategies here, but I’ll try to do that. I think it is important that
however we go about approaching this, we want to continue to focus on our policy goals and the
loss function that we’ll be facing and make the appropriate choices in that way. With that in
mind, a couple of the—“principles” is too strong a word, but—things that I’m thinking about are
that I favor an approach that allows for considerable patience in our initial steps toward
tightening. I think we want to have the opportunity that, if we start embarking upon this and
things happen differently than we are expecting with the economy and inflation, we haven’t
committed ourselves to a path that is too difficult. We want to maintain flexibility, and we want
to have flexibility in both directions because, again, things can happen. We want to maintain
optionality in each direction. Now, fortunately, I think that both of the options described in the
staff memos can allow for this flexibility, and I simply point to the fact that they have calibrated
options 1 and 2 to have about the same amount of policy restraint imposed along the way. So I
don’t find myself in wild disagreement with either approach.
I do continue to modestly favor option 1, which would entail increasing the federal funds
rate before we embark on asset sales, but the way that I tend to think about monetary policy is
perhaps a little too simplistically, given the complexities that we have right now. I tend to think
of it in terms of the single dimension of our policy restraint, and I think I can map a lot of what
you’re talking about into that dimension.
I do worry a little bit when we talk about how the funds rate is a familiar tool, we’ve used
it before, and everybody understands that. I think that’s certainly true when we’re able to put
April 26–27, 2011
61 of 244
pressure on reserves the way we always have in the past. But as soon as we start wondering
about whether or not our reserve draining tools will actually be as effective as we think and
whatnot, we’re going to be relying on arbitrage between interest on excess reserves and the funds
rate. And while in theory that should work, in practice I’m not quite sure how all that will play
out. If we find that we start off on that path and, it is not working out, there will be credibility
risks, but at any rate, that’s the approach I favor.
On the four questions, yes, I think the first step should be to stop reinvesting. I think of
this more in terms of the signaling effect that we get from that because of the unique feature of
redemptions versus sales. I think the Treasuries could be reinvested if the balance sheet, the size
of it and its composition, was satisfactory, along the lines that President Lacker was suggesting.
We ultimately want to end up with a Treasury balance sheet, and so if that works, that’s fine.
In terms of actively varying the pace of asset sales, that’s not my first choice. I would
use the reserve draining tools. But if the state of monetary policy required a quicker restraint,
then we’d want to consider upping asset sales faster. Ultimately, that could be a point of
compromise between the different views.
In terms of sequencing, I think option 1 is best in my opinion, so that would be sales
later—again, making sure that the response to the ultimate stance of monetary policy is really
important. And I agree with all of the last three statements as well.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Rosengren.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. As I think about exit strategy, my
philosophy would be driven by three guiding principles. First, tightening occurs when we shrink
our balance sheet or raise interest rates. If we were to choose to shrink the balance sheet in the
late fall, as in the Tealbook, that would, in effect, be our first monetary policy tightening, even
April 26–27, 2011
62 of 244
though the federal funds rate would still be at the zero bound. In my view, the start of any
tightening action should be primarily focused on when, looking ahead two to three years, the
tightening is needed to prevent us from overshooting our inflation or employment mandate.
Second, returning to more traditional monetary policy is desirable and requires shrinking the
balance sheet. We should shrink the balance sheet in a way consistent with achieving the right
macroeconomic outcome. In the short run, that probably means relying on a floor system. And
third, while returning to an all-Treasury portfolio is a long-term goal, it should not be a shortterm goal. Given the fragility of the housing market, I would not sell any of the mortgagebacked securities until after we have commenced raising short-term interest rates.
So how would I apply these principles to the actual sequencing? Once tightening was
appropriate to avoid overshooting on inflation or employment mandates, I would start by
allowing mortgage-backed securities to roll off the balance sheet as they matured, which would
begin the process of shrinking the balance sheet. After determining the impact of not reinvesting
the proceeds for mortgage-backed securities on long-term interest rates and the economy, and
assuming further tightening was appropriate, I would begin allowing both Treasury and
mortgage-backed securities to roll off the balance sheet as the securities matured. If even more
tightening was necessary, I would consider selling short-dated Treasury securities, which would
reduce our balance sheet more quickly without realizing significant capital losses or having as
large an effect on long rates or mortgage-backed securities.
If we use a rough rule of thumb that’s a little bit more conservative than what was
discussed before—$250 billion in excess reserve reductions as roughly equivalent to a 25 basis
point reduction of the federal funds rate—we have roughly six 25 basis point increases in
balance sheet reductions. Should the economy falter, we could slow down redemptions, and if
April 26–27, 2011
63 of 244
further tightening was appropriate, we could speed up the time we would return to a normalized
size for the balance sheet. Given the natural runoffs in the balance sheet once we begin the
redemptions, the balance sheet does begin to shrink relatively quickly if we allow both Treasury
and mortgage-backed securities to run off, as the Chairman earlier observed.
If even more tightening is necessary before our balance sheet size has normalized, we
would begin by raising interest on excess reserves. Given the Tealbook forecast, I can imagine
this would be necessary a year or more after we begin the redemption process. I would use the
interest on excess reserves as our principal short-term interest rate until we had normalized the
balance sheet. After we had normalized the size of our balance sheet and begun raising interest
rates, I would commence with sales of mortgage-backed securities. However, depending on
housing conditions, the status of Freddie and Fannie, and our willingness to realize capital losses,
I could imagine extending the asset sales to be more gradual and to have an all-Treasuries
portfolio by 2020.
In terms of the four questions asked, for the first one, I am fine with reinvesting the
principal payments from agency securities, but as I just mentioned, I would stagger it. I would
start with mortgage-backed securities and then let the Treasury securities roll off. The reason I
want to shrink the balance sheet is that I have somewhat more uncertainty about how the tools
are going to work with large excess balances, so I would actually prefer a strategy that gets our
balance sheet to shrink initially, just to have more certainty about how our short-run tools are
going to work.
In terms of the second question, I think we could conduct it much the way we did the
increase in securities. We would announce a reduction in the balance sheet over a fixed period
of time, but it would be conditioned on what the economic outcomes were, and we could change
April 26–27, 2011
64 of 244
either the time or the amount, but the presumption would be that we wouldn’t change it unless
something relatively significant had occurred.
In terms of sequencing in the third question, one of the challenges is that sequencing in
part does depend on conditions. So if we’re going to have a very gradual tightening, then a
strategy of asset redemption may actually take care of, at least initially, some of the tightening
that we would need to do. If it needs to be more rapid, then we have to include not only asset
redemptions, but also the interest on excess reserves going up.
And in terms of the three statements in the fourth question, despite all of us having
guiding principles that are different, I think we all agree on all three of the statements.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. It shows there is constructive ambiguity. [Laughter]
President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I, too, would like to thank the staff for
their framing of a complex set of issues and tradeoffs. Before I answer any questions, I’d like to
express some preliminary views.
First, as others have said, I see the endgame as a return to a balance sheet configuration
that aligns with more-normal conduct of monetary policy and has the best chance of
effectiveness in shaping economic conditions consistent with our mandates. I see that
configuration as all-Treasuries, scaled at a level that supports the use of the fed funds rate target
as the central policy instrument operating within a corridor structure.
To some extent, removal of accommodation will effectively begin with an announcement
effect resulting from our first communication about exit. I think it is possible with good
communication to limit the announcement effect on the announcement of ceasing reinvestments,
and I think we may be able to limit an announcement effect even with the initiation of small asset
April 26–27, 2011
65 of 244
sales, but this will require skillful communication, and it seems to me that the timing would best
coincide with the Chairman’s press conferences so that he can explain that a rise in the fed funds
rate is not necessarily imminent.
The unknown of the announcement effect associated with the first step may be an
argument for not taking this action too far in advance of the decision to implement the full exit
plan. I think the objective should be that any substantial announcement effects on long rates
would occur when we have decided to actively begin removal of accommodation and not before.
Said differently, I’d place a high priority on avoiding any actions that inadvertently cause policy
tightening to begin before the Committee has arrived at a consensus that tightening is warranted
by economic conditions. Because in my view we will be in new territory in unwinding the
policy actions of the last three years, I prefer an approach that recognizes that there are a number
of unknowns. This in my mind argues for a simple and conservative plan that minimizes the
risks of market distortions and can be relatively easily communicated. I would favor an
accelerated pace of asset sales only to the extent that policy effectiveness and market function
are not put at risk.
With those preliminary comments, let me give answers to the four questions. For
question 1, I agree that the first step should be stopping reinvestment of principal payment of
agency securities, and I would also stop reinvestment of Treasuries at that time.
For question 2, along with the question of starting the cessation of some or all
reinvestments comes the question of when. My thinking is that we would stop reinvestment
when the Committee agrees that conditions have evolved to the point that any notion of QE3 can
be taken off the table. I favor a predetermined and announced-in-advance path for asset sales.
There may be some learning involved as the asset sales proceed, so my preference would be for
April 26–27, 2011
66 of 244
an approach that is relatively conservative in terms of the pace of sales. As I said, I do not view
a quick reduction of the balance sheet as an end in itself. I would not want to implement sales at
a pace that would add a lot of de facto tightening beyond what we intend with interest rate
policy. I think it will be possible to communicate a predetermined asset sales program and at the
same time convey that the program could be revised or halted if conditions dictate.
For question 3, I would prefer to start asset sales simultaneously with beginning to move
the fed funds rate and the interest rate on excess reserves. Given the unknowns, I’m wary of too
much sequencing and too many moving parts that have to be coordinated. In my thinking, when
the Committee decides it’s time to move, all the wheels are set in motion.
I agree with the thrust of the statements in question 4. In some respects, I think the exact
process we use to remove policy accommodation is less important than our communications
about the timing, magnitude, and conditionality of our planned actions. I would not want any
early communications on a framework to impact private expectations in such a way that we end
up with a de facto removal of accommodation before we make the decision to change the policy
stance.
To summarize, the approach I would recommend tries to achieve simplicity and the least
risk, and it’s really a two-step approach. At a point not long before active exit, we cease
reinvestment of both MBS and Treasuries. Then, simultaneously, we raise the interest on
reserves rate and the fed funds rate target, and begin a gradual, orderly, preannounced program
of asset sales. We leave to the Desk the decision on draining operations as a tactical move to
improve the ability to hit the fed funds rate target, and we communicate that the pace of sales
will be reviewed periodically in light of economic conditions. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Hoenig.
April 26–27, 2011
67 of 244
MR. HOENIG. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. A couple of people around the table have
mentioned 1937, and I think it’s an interesting comparison and one we should keep in mind. I
think it was in that period that we have some similarities to today. There were efforts to increase
taxes and concern about excess reserves that were sloshing around, and I think we doubled
reserve requirements overnight, which caused a major shock to the economy. And I certainly
would agree that we do not want to shock the economy. And I don’t think we’re going to double
reserve requirements—I certainly hope not—or take actions that would move us in that direction.
The second thing I want to observe is that, as we deal with this exit strategy, I think we
will be adjusting it as we learn because whether you like the definition of “perfect
substitutability” or not, we have no idea what the substitutability is between our fed funds rate
moves and our removal of the sizable assets on our balance sheet. So it’s going to be a careful
learning experience for us.
The third thing I want to note is that in part our comments on option 1 or option 2, as I
have listened to them around the table, depend on our own intuitive feel for how close we are to
needing to take action. I can understand that, because it has influenced my own view; I think
that as we look at the economy today, we should be talking about where we are in terms of our
accommodation, and that we should in fact be thinking about removing accommodation. It is
highly accommodative, as we will talk about later today and tomorrow, and we need to think
about doing that. That means I would focus on the fed funds rate, as we always do. And to your
point, President Bullard, I think that is what people understand best. They don’t understand
QE3; they just know it’s out there. But they do understand moving interest rates, especially the
fed funds rate. And that’s what we need to focus on. One other point—I don’t know that we
April 26–27, 2011
68 of 244
will know whether QE2 has been successful at least until the year 2015. It’s a long, long
gestation process.
Around those issues, then, how do I answer the questions? How do we proceed, subject
to the idea that we need to be thinking about our fed funds policy? I do say yes to the first
question that we should in fact stop reinvestments as conditions allow us. But my first step in
the exit strategy is to change the forward guidance from exceptionally low interest rates for an
extended period of time. That is the key, that is the signal, and we should be thinking about that
as we think about exit. With that, our next move should be to move the fed funds rate up—
1 percent by year-end or something—but that means the process has started.
Then, the second question. I think, after raising the fed funds rate to some point, I would
pause and assess our economic prospects—where we are, what the effects have been, whether we
shocked the market, what are the conditions. When and if conditions warrant, I would then
begin again to normalize policy at a deliberate pace, raising the fed funds rate and redeeming and
selling securities concurrently to the extent that we can. There is judgment here. We would
regularly review changes in the fed funds rate and asset sales in light of incoming information
and adjust the exit program as needed to best foster maximum employment and price stability—
long-term, stable variables, not short-term ones. As long as conditions unfold as expected, I
would also expect to continue normalizing policy at some regular pace. Of course, if economic
conditions do not unfold as expected, then we should prepare ourselves to normalize policy more
or less rapidly based on those conditions, as we judge them at each meeting.
For the third question, my preferred sequencing is that we raise the fed funds rate from its
crisis level to closer to 1 percent as quickly as possible, ideally by year-end. I believe we should
then normalize both the fed funds rate and the balance sheet in terms of size, composition, and
April 26–27, 2011
69 of 244
duration. I think that part of the reason we are doing these repos and so forth rather than selling
assets is that we want to keep the duration on our balance sheet and out of the rest. I think we
should try and get that transitioned as well, so we should be selling assets as we can, and on a
faster timeline as well.
On question 4, yes, I agree. Of course, my definition of “intermediate term” may differ
from your definition of “intermediate term.” And that should be a discussion that we have here.
I think it’s important. I would expect that we can renormalize policy and our balance sheet more
timely than either option 1 or option 2 outlines. But I am willing to debate that over time, as
long as we get on the path to take this excess accommodation out of the system before we get a
very bad surprise on the other end.
With three interest rates—the federal funds rate, the interest rate on excess reserves, and
the discount rate—I believe we will eventually move to either a floor system or a corridor
system. Before making this decision, though, I would prefer to see how events unfold as we
move toward a more normal stance on monetary policy overall. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. My preferences pretty much
track option 1. First, I prefer to start with ending the reinvestment of agency debt and agency
MBS. While I agree with President Kocherlakota’s point on the pro-cyclicality of agency MBS,
and because I made that point last August—[laughter]—I would point out a couple of important
caveats that I think make it less important right now. One, the amount of prepayments is actually
quite low today. Two, if we are actually tightening and long-term rates are going up, then the
prepayments will drop even further. We won’t be in that range of where the pro-cyclicality is
very powerful. And, three, if the economy is strengthening and housing turnover picks up, the
April 26–27, 2011
70 of 244
pro-cyclicality will actually go the other way. We will get more housing turnover, and there will
be more churn in the agency MBS market from a healthier housing market. So I am willing to
accept what I would view as more limited pro-cyclicality in exchange for wanting to shrink the
balance sheet. Second, I would end the Treasury reinvestment. And third, I would eliminate the
“extended period” language.
Now, whether you do these as a package or you do them in a sequence, I think it really
depends on economic conditions at the time. I really don’t want to prejudge whether we do all
three together, or whether we do one and then the other and then the other. It depends on why
we are tightening monetary policy. I can imagine if we were tightening monetary policy because
inflation expectations were rising, we might want to do it in a more subdued sequence. But if we
saw that the economy that was very strong, we might want to do it all together as a package.
Second, I’d drain a large quantity of reserves. I don’t think this is absolutely necessary
for the conduct of monetary policy, but to the extent that people are worried about the large
quantity of the reserves in the banking system and that this could lead to an inflationary problem,
we should take steps to attenuate those concerns.
Third, I would raise the interest rate on excess reserves. I do believe this tool is sufficient
to manage monetary policy. The signal I take away from the change in the deposit insurance
premiums and its impact on the IOER–fed funds rate spreads is that the arbitrage works pretty
efficiently because we had a little test case here where we basically changed the arbitrage
conditions slightly, and we had a slight impact on the IOER–fed funds rate spread in a way that
was pretty predictable. So this tells me that I think the arbitrage is going to work pretty well.
We’ll see a federal funds rate that is modestly below the interest rate on excess reserves.
April 26–27, 2011
71 of 244
And then, last, I would sell the agency MBS and agency debt assets, and I would do so at
a measured, predictable pace. I don’t think it’s necessary to sell these assets; I’m less hung up on
the fact that we have agency MBS assets on our balance sheet. But in the medium term, I think
the Committee has a consensus that we want to go back to an all-Treasury portfolio. If you want
to get there in any reasonable time frame, then you are going to have to sell agency MBS.
I don’t believe it makes sense for time-varying sales tied to changes in interest on excess
reserves. I think it is too complicated and too difficult to explain. Also, if the sales effect works
through changes in expectations on how fast the stock is likely to change, shifting around the
sales rate will cause changes in people’s views of what the future stock is likely to be. I think
that will create volatility in longer-term rates and might even lead to a higher risk premium and
higher long-term rates as a consequence. So I think that’s a risky strategy.
I generally believe that the sales rate should be relatively slow, because faced with a
choice of a flatter yield curve or a steeper yield curve, I would favor a flatter yield curve. The
more you rely on asset sales, the more you are going to steepen the yield curve, which I think
potentially has negative consequences for financial stability. Also, the more asset sales you do,
the more likely you are to incur losses on your portfolio that can create political difficulties for
the Fed and potentially pose a threat to the Fed’s independence. So, on the asset-sales side, I
would like to go relatively slowly. The asset sales pace, of course, could be adjusted, but I think
the bar to adjustments should be pretty high because I don’t think we want to create uncertainty
about what those stock effects are likely to be over time.
With respect to question 4, I think that we all agree that we want to go back to a SOMA
portfolio that is no larger than what is consistent with implementing our monetary policy
framework. But we should recognize that that size might be somewhat different, depending on
April 26–27, 2011
72 of 244
whether we are going to a floor system or a corridor system. We might want a slightly bigger
balance sheet if we are headed to a floor system. I think it is premature to decide whether we
want a floor system or a corridor system, because we are going to find out a lot about how well a
floor system works over the next few years. If that system works very well, we might decide that
the simplicity, in terms of how you actually implement a floor system, might make it attractive.
So I wouldn’t want to rule it out a priori.
I think we should be heading back to an all-Treasury portfolio, but we shouldn’t be
heading back to the same Treasury portfolio we had before. I think we should have a Treasury
portfolio that is much more weighted toward short-term Treasury securities, so that in a crisis
you can just let the Treasury securities run off very quickly—you don’t have to sell Treasury
securities, and you don’t have to worry about whether you are taking losses. At some point, it’s
going to require us to actually buy a bunch of short-dated Treasury securities, if we agree that
that is a good portfolio to have. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thanks, Mr. Chairman. I wanted to follow up on this point
that I learned from Vice Chairman Dudley last August, and now I’m apparently going to have to
unlearn it. [Laughter]
My concern is that if we adopt a policy of redeeming MBS—suppose we do that in
December 2011—and conditions soften in 2012 and longer-term rates fall, we will then be put in
the position of stopping the policy at that point, because it could well be at that stage that we will
begin to see people starting to pay down their mortgages more rapidly, just as we did in August
2010. My vision, as I think I have heard from others around the table, is that the balance sheet
track should be going on slowly downward in the background. If we redeem MBS, we are going
April 26–27, 2011
73 of 244
to be in the position of balance sheet management immediately. That is what I took away from
that.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Can I respond to that? I think what you are describing is
an environment where you don’t want to be tightening at all. If you start tightening and then all
of a sudden decide you don’t want to be tightening, then I don’t really have a problem reversing
the agency MBS reinvestment policy.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Governor Yellen.
MS. YELLEN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. And let me add my thanks to the staff for
their helpful background papers and to President Plosser for his thoughtful memo.
As I reviewed those materials, I was struck that the problem before us is a classic
example of an underdetermined optimization problem. There are a number of free parameters
and a multiplicity of ways we can set our instruments to attain any particular macroeconomic
outcome. In selecting among the various options, I believe we should focus on approaches that,
first, serve to simplify and, therefore, facilitate our internal decisionmaking as we respond over
time to evolving economic developments. And, second, we should focus on approaches that
facilitate clarity in our external communications to the public.
An analogy might be helpful in explaining what I have in mind. Imagine that our
Committee is the flight crew of a Boeing 747. We need to land at night at a nearly deserted
airport, but we discover that the air traffic controller has fallen asleep on the job. [Laughter]
The good news is, we have a brilliant and highly experienced pilot, and all of us trust him to
accomplish a safe landing. Nonetheless, we have to keep in mind a few key facts. First, the
instrument panel of a Boeing 747 has lots of dials and instruments. There is no unique right way
to adjust them during the approach. Second, the cockpit is crowded, and the crew needs to work
April 26–27, 2011
74 of 244
together harmoniously to execute a successful landing. And, third, the passengers are all
listening on the intercom system—[laughter]—and may be prone to panic. Our communications
need to be clear, simple, and reassuring.
How does this analogy apply to our exit strategy? Well, first and foremost, I suggest that
we agree on where we’re landing. [Laughter] In the context of our exit strategy, where we are
landing includes a number of distinct components. The first relates to our dual mandate
objectives. We need to be clear, both internally and in our public communications, that, first and
foremost, our exit strategy is designed to facilitate their attainment. Second, the Federal Reserve
is also responsible to contribute to the effective and efficient functioning of financial markets, so
we should avoid needless disruption. And, finally, there are questions relating to the ultimate
size and composition of our balance sheet and the operating strategy we’ve planned for the
conduct of policy when life returns to normal. I consider it desirable for us to decide and
communicate early our decisions concerning all of these matters, not leave them unsettled for
months or years to come.
In this regard, I support all three principles listed in item number 4 of the “Questions for
Discussion” handout, and I think it would be very helpful, Mr. Chairman, for you to convey them
in your press conference tomorrow. I think it would also be beneficial for us to reach some
consensus on our long-run operating framework. And I personally could support a return over
time to a corridor-style operating framework in which the fed funds target is our primary
instrument of monetary policy, even though I do see some advantages of a floor framework.
Turning next to our landing procedures, the memos and our previous discussion make
clear that there are many options consistent with any given macroeconomic outcome. All in all, I
see a strong rationale for following a KISS—or Keep It Simple, Stupid—approach. I see a
April 26–27, 2011
75 of 244
compelling case for setting the path of the federal funds rate target in a state-contingent manner
that would be consistent with our past practice and with market experience and expectations.
Those of us in the cockpit have followed this approach in the past, so it should facilitate our
decisionmaking process. For the passengers, too, it is familiar, and therefore likely to be
reassuring. And, in particular, I would be strongly opposed to an exit strategy in which
adjustments for both our balance sheet and the federal funds rate target are highly statecontingent.
Making use of two monetary policy instruments at the same time has no clear benefits but
would surely introduce a further layer of complexity into our decisionmaking process and our
public communications. I think we should follow a largely predetermined approach to
normalizing the size and composition of our balance sheet. I would prefer for us to agree on that
approach as soon as possible and explain it clearly to the public.
Regarding the initial stages of the descent, I would support stopping reinvestment of
principal as a first step, and my assumption has been that that would include both Treasury and
agency securities. But I think it would be useful, in light of the issue that President Kocherlakota
raised, to maybe just see a bit more staff analysis on the implications of allowing MBS to run off.
I suspect that a decision to suspend our reinvestment policy will clearly signal the onset of policy
firming to the markets and the public. Therefore, I am not certain there is any particular
advantage in waiting to drop the “extended period” language. It might, instead, be helpful to
follow a simpler exit sequence in which we move simultaneously to suspend reinvestment policy
and change our forward guidance.
Turning to the issue of asset sales, I think they should be gradual, predictable, and
announced in advance. Beyond that, I am open to considering various possibilities. For
April 26–27, 2011
76 of 244
example, I would be open to decoupling our strategy for normalizing the size of the balance
sheet from our strategy for normalizing its composition. My assumption is that it is the size of
our longer-term securities holdings, rather than their composition as between agency and
Treasury securities, that affects term premiums and the stance of policy. I also assume that such
a shift would have only a negligible effect on MBS spreads. If these assumptions are correct, we
could begin to normalize the composition of our balance sheet fairly soon. For example, the
Desk could initiate gradual and predictable sales of agency MBS maybe on the order of
$10 billion or $15 billion a month, reinvesting the proceeds into Treasuries.
I would only want our balance sheet to begin shrinking when we have concluded that the
process of policy firming should commence. When that point arrives, though, along with
suspending the reinvestment policy, we could also stop rolling over the proceeds of these MBS
sales into Treasuries. This strategy would facilitate a moderately faster shrinkage of our balance
sheet and would reduce the quantity of bank reserves by a nonnegligible amount before any
increase in IOER. An advantage of this strategy is that, with a smaller quantity of reserves, we
may have greater confidence in the ability of our reserve draining tools to sufficiently tighten the
link between IOER and the federal funds rate. I may be wrong to worry about this link between
IOER and the federal funds rate, but, like President Evans, I do have some concerns about how
tight that link will be. And I think a tighter linkage between these rates would prove helpful for
both internal decisionmaking and external communications.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Duke.
MS. DUKE. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I would also like to commend the staff for the
work on the memos, and I will confess that I failed to identify this as an underdetermined
optimization problem. [Laughter]
April 26–27, 2011
77 of 244
Over the last several years, I have supported asset purchases as our only option for
easing. But when it comes time to tighten, we can return to the short-term interest rate tool, and I
believe we should. I agree with Brian Sack; it is still the strongest tool in our kit. I can’t quarrel
with the political risk of maintaining a large balance sheet or the credit allocation argument. But,
still, I favor the use of the short-term interest rate tool whenever and as soon as it’s available and
would address our concerns about the balance sheet only when our interest rate tool is fully
functional again. We have experience with it. The public has experience with it. It’s easier to
calibrate and to communicate.
In December 2008, when we made the decision to reduce the fed funds target to its
current level, I worried about many of the consequences that we’ve discussed again here today—
the narrow potential for spreads to adjust to preferred levels, pressure on the recovery of
operating costs in money market funds and in banks. I am also concerned about the potential
distortions created by near-zero short-term interest rates. So I favor the strategy that gets
nominal short-term rates back into a normal range the soonest. I say “short-term interest rates”
because I think there is some risk in focusing on the fed funds rate as long as that market is
limited to GSEs and a handful of counterparties. I think the lesson we should take from the
recent experience with the FDIC assessments is that short-term markets may react differently
depending on whether they are dominated by U.S. banks that can earn interest on excess reserves
and must pay FDIC assessments, foreign banks who can earn interest on excess reserves but do
not pay FDIC assessments, or other players who do not have access to excess reserves as an
investment alternative but also do not pay FDIC assessments. Along these lines, I believe we
may observe different results in the use of the reverse repo tool compared with term deposits,
April 26–27, 2011
78 of 244
and I believe banks will bid differently on term deposits when they are offered in size and with
an expectation of increasing rates.
I’m a little bit concerned about the airline analogy, because now I am going to talk about
throwing fuel overboard in order to reduce our landing weight. [Laughter] While I favor the exit
sequence outlined in option 1, I fear that we might have to reduce our balance sheet more than
we think to get reserves down to the point where temporary draining tools can tighten the link
between IOER and other short-term rates.
Turning to the specific questions asked, I agree that the first step should be redemption of
agency securities, and I would favor redemption of Treasury securities only if that step was not
anticipated to push back the first use of the interest rate tool. I would put assets on a
predetermined, preannounced path, subject to infrequent adjustments. I would not be in favor of
any asset sales that delayed liftoff of the funds rate. However, once the funds rate was returned
to a level that allowed us to use it for tightening or easing—say, fed funds at 2 percent—then I
might favor asset sales that reduce the balance sheet more rapidly but delay further increases in
the funds rate. I agree with all the statements in question 4, as long as adjustments to asset sales
are not viewed as an active policy adjustment tool. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Bill Nelson suggested that there may be
some variants on the two options he presented. I have counted 14 so far. [Laughter] And I think
I am going to use a strategy taken in the very best exam that I ever read from any of the roughly
2,000 students I have ever had, which was to refuse to answer the question that I had put on the
exam. I should also add some of the worst exams I ever got were ones that followed a similar
strategy. [Laughter]
April 26–27, 2011
79 of 244
As I have listened to everybody today, I am a bit concerned about where we’re heading
and what we think we are communicating by this discussion. And mindful of the Chairman’s
introduction where he suggested we are trying to find some principles, I am going to try to
identify some principles rather than programs. I think many of you have felt the tension between
these and have suggested where there is some flexibility or where you are open to other things.
But for present purposes, I think it is particularly important to arm the Chairman with a smaller
number of first principles that can be developed, as appropriate, over the coming meetings.
First, I think that the strategy we pursue here should be about, and principally about, our
monetary policy aims in the short run. That may sound almost tautological, but I don’t think it
is. Some people are offended by having MBSs on the balance sheet, and some people are
worried that we appear to be monetizing debt by having Treasuries on the balance sheet. Well,
we’ve got both of them on the balance sheet. And those decisions were taken, and I wouldn’t
want to see our exit strategy affected by some idealized desire to either have or not have some of
these assets on the balance sheet as an ongoing matter. Let’s instead focus on what is the best
way to achieve, as we believe appropriate, the removal of accommodation when the time comes.
So that translates into, I think, a fair number of operational decisions that need to be made along
the way, but ones that should be pretty straightforward.
Second, as the Chairman suggested, I think anything that we communicate ought to be
provisional. And although I didn’t take the notes that he’s been taking, because I don’t have to
synthesize everything, it seemed to me that at least half of you have suggested—whether statecontingent or provisional or conditional—some adjective that suggests we shouldn’t be locking
ourselves in too much right now.
April 26–27, 2011
80 of 244
Third, I also would like to see a pretty clear separation of the “when we exit” from the
“how we exit” questions. I think Tom is absolutely right—everybody’s views are affected, at
least on the margin, by our policy predispositions. But, again, in terms of public communication
right now, I think it’s really quite important to keep those distinct, even though it is perfectly
legitimate to address both of those questions.
I would say that my fourth principle would be a certain degree of caution, particularly
with respect to unintended consequences of things we don’t understand as well as we wish we
did. Narayana suggested that we don’t rely too much on models for thinking about what the
impact of large-scale asset sales will be, and I think that’s a caution well taken. I, like Bill,
worry about yield curve effects if, for example, you had too many assets sold too quickly.
Listening to you and trying to pull some of what different people have said together, it seems to
me there have been concerns about getting the balance sheet to a manageable state so that our
effect on the federal funds rate will proceed as we would like it to. At the same time, a lot of
people have shown concern that there not be too much riling of the markets because we are not
really entirely sure of how asset sales will be received. A number of you have also said that
some measure of predictability will both advance the aim of avoiding too much riling of the
markets and allow people to plan a little bit more going forward.
All of those suggest to me that a fairly cautious but straightforward and largely, though
not totally, predetermined approach to asset sales, redemptions, or both is probably what’s
warranted here. I see a certain appeal to going in reverse, what Jim described as the LIFO
approach. But I think there are a couple of points of distinction that we should be aware of. One
is that the effects of these sales may differ from the effects of the purchases of the same assets
precisely because the macro and financial environments in which the transactions are taking
April 26–27, 2011
81 of 244
place are quite different. Second, to a considerable extent, we didn’t have a whole lot of choice
about the sequence that was followed on the way in. You guys moved interest rates down to
zero before I got here. Then you had your “extended period” tool, and then it became necessary
to think about large-scale asset purchases. But on the way out, we do have a choice, and I think
that assessing the pros and cons of various sequences and various combinations is probably the
better optimization of policy here.
There are multiple instruments available for the removal of accommodation, and I think a
number of you have identified them. I genuinely don’t have strong priors on those, so I would
just reiterate that I think the principle should be a focus on the desired near-term monetary policy
effects, thereby putting into a secondary position what I termed “idealized aims”; second, that
this is provisional; third, that we separate “when” from “how”; and, fourth, that, particularly with
respect to asset sales, we try to adopt a gradual and predictable approach. Thank you, Mr.
Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Raskin.
MS. RASKIN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I appreciate the richness of this debate
regarding the parameters of exit, and while I believe it premature to begin the exit program, it’s
certainly not premature to discuss the contours of what will be a process that, if poorly conceived
and poorly communicated and poorly received, could lead to unintended macroeconomic
consequences. For that reason, I applaud the fact that we’re now having this discussion, and
while not being present for the precursors to the analysis that began in April of last year,
appreciate both that there’s been a lot of careful thought on this topic and that the duration and
components of the accommodation are different now than they were in April of last year.
April 26–27, 2011
82 of 244
I have several observations. First, I want to underscore the Chairman’s view that public
statements regarding exit not confuse the notion of “when” with the notion of “how.”
Second, both options for sequencing, as presented in the staff memo, assume that a
sizable amount of reserve draining will be conducted before the first anticipated increase in the
federal funds rate target. I’m still grappling with how such a sizable amount is going to be
reduced in a mere six months in option 1 or in a mere three months in option 2. I understand
President Lockhart’s concern about starting the draining too early, but if reserves are as high as
$1.6 trillion and the required reserve level at which movements in the federal funds rate affect
loan balances is at something like $74 billion, how do we drain $1½ trillion in the short period of
time without disruptions? If these reductions prove to be too slow and there is strong evidence
that a recovery is self-sustaining, perhaps we would then feel it necessary to engage in some
accelerated asset sales ahead of a preannounced schedule in order to drain.
Third, I want to make sure we understand the current effect of the GSEs in the federal
funds markets. Commercial banks are awash in reserves. So my question is whether the largest
sell-side participants right now are Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac. Now, footnotes 17 and 18 of
the staff’s memo on the long-run policy implementation frameworks describe why limits to
arbitrage have resulted in market rates typically being in the range of 10 to 15 basis points below
the interest rate on excess reserves. So if we suppose that the Chairman and the Secretary of the
Treasury agreed that Fannie and Freddie could no longer be part of the federal funds market,
would we then remove the ability for commercial banks to trade with the GSEs in such a way as
to eliminate the gap between market rates and the interest rate on excess reserves? So then if the
federal funds rate were at the IOER, the FOMC, it seems to me, would have greater control when
it begins to raise the IOER because the fed funds rate would move exactly with it.
April 26–27, 2011
83 of 244
Fourth, regardless of whether Fannie and Freddie remain part of the federal funds market,
I want to underscore the communication challenge that was raised by President Bullard and
others that will need to be addressed, and that is that raising the interest rate on excess reserves
will result in annual payments to banks, which will certainly require some explanation to the
Congress and others in the public.
Finally, when we discuss asset sales, we assume that such sales include sales of
Treasuries in addition to sales of agency debt and agency MBS. As we’ve heard, there are
permutations to how these sales are executed that involve sales of one type before sales of
another type, and from this perspective, I think it’s worth remembering that MBS have a more
direct linkage to mortgage rates than do Treasury bills. Also, it’s worth noting that President
Kocherlakota’s observation regarding the pro-cyclicality in MBS sales needs to be factored in
ahead of time as well, if we decide to start MBS sales ahead of Treasury sales.
I will turn quickly to the questions. One, Should the first step in exit be to stop the
current policy of reinvesting? I would say, yes. I think that redemptions would generate a
significant reduction in the balance sheet under an approach that is operationally simple, easily
communicated, and not disruptive to markets. For the second question, it is also my view that
putting asset sales on a largely predetermined and preannounced path is preferable. I haven’t yet
bought into the full substitutability of the two tools primarily because of a lack of a robust
experiment in that regard. Third, at this moment I probably would favor starting to sell assets
after the increase in the federal funds rate. I don’t place a high priority on reducing the size of
the SOMA portfolio quickly, especially if that would delay liftoff of the federal funds rate. Of
course, I would say that subject to the caveats I mentioned regarding the ability to drain or a
April 26–27, 2011
84 of 244
dangerous supply shock that would trigger a big jump in inflationary expectations. And I do
agree with the three statements in question four. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you very much, and thanks, everyone, for a very
useful discussion.
In terms of synthesizing [laughter] this discussion, we have a short-term and a long-term
issue. In the weeks ahead as the staff adroitly puts together the minutes, as they always do, I
hope that they will go carefully through the transcript and try to identify the main themes that
will help us think about how we’ll go forward.
I have a more immediate problem, which is that tomorrow I’m going to be asked what the
Committee has determined about exit strategy. So I’m going to try to put some principles or
bullet points down here—Debbie is going to write them down for me—and then let me go
through them, and we can decide if some should be struck or qualified or whatever.
First is that we had a useful discussion.
MR. TARULLO. I disagree. [Laughter]
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. And second, relating to what Governor Tarullo said, the
most important thing, of course, is to meet our monetary policy objectives, and the pace and
sequencing of our actions will be driven by those objectives. In particular, the fact that we’re
discussing exit does not necessarily carry implications for near-term monetary policy.
Now, getting into more substance—first, I think most people were willing to say that they
thought that the federal funds rate/IOER should be the principal tool for responding to
macroeconomic developments. I would add that, as a practical matter and taking into account
President Lacker’s very astute comments, to make IOER effective, it will probably need to be
April 26–27, 2011
85 of 244
supported by the draining tools that we’ve discussed in this room for some time. So I would put
the funds rate /IOER in the center of our strategy.
Second, I would say that our forward guidance and our communication will provide as
much warning as possible as we move toward the point where we begin to raise the short-term
interest rate.
The remainder of the points, some of which may perhaps be controversial, bear on how
we’re going to deal with the balance sheet. The first one is that I believe that a pretty strong
majority agreed with the view that restarting redemptions—and I wouldn’t be specific about
agencies versus Treasuries, et cetera—could be something that might happen relatively early in
the process. Next—and here I would turn to the three statements on the sheet—one objective we
have is that in the intermediate term we want to return to a normal monetary policy framework. I
don’t think it’s time to start talking to the public about corridors and floors, but maybe a “normal
framework” that I think most people would interpret as something close to a corridor system.
The second of these principles is that our exit strategy involves going to an all-Treasury
balance sheet.
The third principle bears on the question of the pace and conditionality of asset sales, and
there we got quite a bit of divergence, particularly when weighted by enthusiasm. Now, a
majority of the speakers did prefer a relatively steady pace of sales, although a couple of those
folks were for very rapid sales and others were for more gradual sales, so it’s a little hard to rank
those views. On the other hand, I think most of the people who favored a relatively gradual sales
process were open to the proposition that the pace of sales could be adjusted if macroeconomic
conditions called for it. So I would propose to summarize that detailed discussion with the last
of the three bullet points, which says that there will be a framework that will be “communicated
April 26–27, 2011
86 of 244
to the public in advance, and at a pace that potentially could be adjusted in response to changes
in economic or financial conditions.” I think the “potentially could be adjusted” leans a little bit
toward nonconditionality, but I think it includes the possibility that we can respond and we will
respond if economic conditions warrant.
Finally—and this is a difficult one—When will the asset sales take place? Now, again, in
simple counts, a pretty clear majority, but again with different motivations and different
perspectives, favored asset sales after the increase in the federal funds rate. We had a few people
who suggested a contemporaneous move, such as President Plosser and President Lockhart.
President Bullard, of course, made his very interesting intervention about the LIFO principle. A
few people, like President Lacker, wanted to move very quickly, so that, implicitly, sales would
come very early. I think, looking at the balance of the discussion, what I’d like to do is say
something like “most, but not all,” or “many,” or something like that, “saw sales as taking
place,” and I would say here, again, vaguely, “relatively late in the process,” which would
encompass, perhaps, “contemporaneous with the increase in rates,” like President Hoenig
suggested, or “afterward”—but again, acknowledging that some people had a different
perspective.
So these would be some interim things that I would try to report, again, as asked. Some
of these details may not come up, but I suspect some of them will.
MR. FISHER. Could you clarify, Mr. Chairman, that last point? I have a feeling that
will come up.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. The last point, yes. I’ve got a little diagram here that shows
the interest rate being increased, and then the question is: Where do asset sales come on this
timeline? I note that a few people were in the contemporaneous camp—and, President Fisher, I
April 26–27, 2011
87 of 244
have you there with an arrow pointed to the left, meaning that you’re happy to go along with the
Bullard perspective. That being said, a pretty significant majority still were on the right side of
that line—that is, suggesting that asset sales should begin after the interest rate increases would
begin, and that’s consistent, I think, with the view that the federal funds rate is the key policy
tool. I think this is an area where there was legitimate and interesting ongoing discussion that we
shouldn’t cut off.
Again, what I proposed was to hedge in two ways. One, we would say that “most, but
not all,” or “many,” or something like that, “preferred,” and then to use some term like
“relatively late in the process” to encompass contemporaneous or later sales. This may be even a
little too weak, but that was my thought.
I’d be happy to go through any of these again. I don’t promise even that they’ll come out
exactly as I just spoke them. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. I have just two observations. I think you’re being asked to synthesize a
lot of diverse views, and I understand that. I think your first point was that the asset sales or the
reduction in the balance sheet would depend on economic conditions. I would encourage you to
say that they can either be slowed down or speeded up, because I think the tone of how you say it
will suggest that it’s only likely to go one way. It would be helpful to say that it could go either
faster or slower depending on economic conditions.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Well, “at a pace that potentially could be adjusted in
response to changes.”
MR. PLOSSER. Up or down.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Yes, up or down.
April 26–27, 2011
88 of 244
MR. PLOSSER. Okay. On the last part, I would recommend against the phrase
“relatively late” because I think that connotes a longer period of time, and it may not be longer. I
would suggest that you consider something like, “Many of the participants agreed that asset sales
would begin after”—just “after”—“initial rate increases.” And “after” can mean it could be
short or it could be long. It just leaves it undefined.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Can I say “after” if I say “many” and I’m very clear that
there’s still an open debate on this question?
MR. LACKER. Would it help to say “after in the sequence?”
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. In the sequence we had last year the redemptions
weren’t much of an issue. Now we have redemptions early or one of the first steps. We have
changes in the language, obviously, as one of the first steps. We have in the center of this
process the increase in interest rates supported by draining tools. And then, most, but certainly
not all—and we have an ongoing debate—preferred that the sales begin after the first increase in
the IOER.
President Bullard, I know you’re going to be giving your point of view, and I think it’s an
interesting point of view, but I’ll try to make sure that I am clear that these things are not fine
lines.
MR. BULLARD. I do think you’re summarizing the disparate views of the Committee
fairly well, but I think this issue about redemptions being a lot different from asset sales is
potentially confusing. In a sense we are starting with the balance sheet if you went by the
sequence, but we’re going to start in a certain way with the balance sheet.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Yes.
April 26–27, 2011
89 of 244
MR. BULLARD. And it’s just that the Committee seems to be reluctant to go as far as I
would in wanting to adjust that.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Well, it’s true that they both shrink the balance sheet, but
redemptions are predictable, passive, but I agree that there is sort of a LIFO principle there
though.
MR. BULLARD. Yes.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. So I agree with that. Any further comments? Governor
Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Can I just ask a question? In the same spirit in which I spoke in the
go-round, I guess I would just ask the question of how deeply you want to get into this
tomorrow, given where the Committee is right now. That is, one strategy is to try fairly, as I
think you have in your summation, to characterize how the Committee breaks down on a number
of substantive dimensions with some specificity. Another would be to try to identify genuine
consensus where it’s there, and I think you’ve got it on those three true–false questions, but in
other areas, maybe intentionally to generalize so as not to get too deeply into some of these
questions. For example, as I was listening to these guys at the end of the table, I found myself
thinking a little bit differently about the redemption versus asset sales point than I had before,
and to me it’s not so fundamental to our approach. Maybe it is to some people. I guess I just
wonder whether in a press conference you want to begin talking about those things, thereby
potentially inviting further specific questions. My question is not a rhetorical one. It’s a genuine
one.
April 26–27, 2011
90 of 244
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I think I have to balance, as you say. I mean, I can’t go into
too great a detail, but I hardly can deny that we had this conversation because the minutes will
come out and many of these issues will be on the table. President Fisher.
MR. FISHER. I want to second that point. I think the more you begin to process, the
more you’re likely to get questions that force you further to process. I think providing these
general outlines and a direction is what counts here. You’re going to have subsequent press
conferences, but it could be a trap. So I agree with Governor Tarullo on this front, and I would
just be as general as possible.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. On the other hand, the point of this is to be more
transparent and to provide some help and guidance.
MR. FISHER. Still, you’re going to get questions on specifics of sequence and all of
these kinds of things if you’re not careful.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Well, I obviously won’t be able to answer detailed
questions, because I don’t know the answer.
MR. TARULLO. I don’t think this is a matter of being more or less transparent in a
sense because I think you’re trying to communicate where we are at this point.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I will try to do that, but I did want to make sure I knew
where we were. [Laughter] President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. I find myself very sympathetic to Governor Tarullo’s points. On this
last issue, which seems to be the one where it comes to a head, do you worry that just mentioning
the views of a majority might lead a stampede of opinion to focus on that and treat it as if it’s a
decision? And the constructive alternative would be to mention that there are a range of views.
The majority seems to favor, but there are those who have other views and we haven’t decided.
April 26–27, 2011
91 of 244
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I said I would say that.
MR. LACKER. Oh, okay. Mention the other views as well.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I will be clear. Where appropriate, I will give a range of
views. I just don’t want to be clearly less forthcoming than the minutes will be on something
like that, if asked. I’m not going to go out and say, “Here’s the deal, guys,” and give them the
story. But if asked about that, I’ll try to convey the sense that there was a range of views.
All right. Well, I hope that all the press conferences will not generate this problem, but
thank you for that conversation. Any other comments? [No response]
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Well, wouldn’t this be a great time for a break? [Laughter]
I’m informed the coffee is at—three o’clock?
MS. DANKER. We can just go look and see if it’s there.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. All right. My right-hand woman is going to go look. Is it
ready?
MS. DANKER. Keep going.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. We should keep going? Okay. We can hear the staff
presentation and then at three o’clock we will have a coffee break. So let me turn this over now
to David Wilcox.
MR. WILCOX. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. It’s been a humbling realization as
the hours have gone by that the only shot I have at garnering a round of applause
would be to say, “Nathan and I will now be happy to take your questions.” However,
I am going to dash any hopes you might have along those lines and give you my full
prepared remarks.
As you know from the Tealbook, a lengthy list of indicators came in to the
disappointing side of our expectations during the intermeeting period. I will keep the
recitation here short and come back to some of these items later in my remarks, and
simply note now that both the residential and nonresidential construction sectors
succeeded in tripping on the already-low bars we had set for them in the March
Tealbook; state and local spending was similarly even softer than we had expected;
April 26–27, 2011
92 of 244
and federal purchases took a puzzling dive in the first quarter, especially in the
defense area.
That said, not all of the news about first-quarter spending was disappointing. You
may recall that just before the March FOMC meeting, we received a softer retail sales
report that instantly put a dent in the forecast we had published just two days earlier.
But the data since then about consumer spending have been generally encouraging—
enough so to restore our forecast for the growth of real PCE in the first quarter to
where it had been in the March Tealbook. Similarly, business investment in
equipment and software looks on track to post a solid gain at an annual rate of
roughly 10 percent in the first quarter, only slightly below our March forecast.
Furthermore, the available indicators of business sentiment, including the regional
and national surveys of purchasing managers, bode well for the near-term outlook for
E&S investment.
All told, the pluses from household and business spending were far outweighed
by the minuses from construction and government spending, and we downgraded our
first-quarter real-GDP growth forecast by 1½ percentage points from the March
Tealbook to just 1¾ percent. Moreover, we chiseled down our forecast for second
quarter growth by ¾ percentage point, to 3 percent.
The larger question that we wrestled with in putting together the forecast was how
to interpret the weaker tone of the incoming data. What underlying economic
mechanisms might be at work, generating an even more sluggish recovery in
spending than we had anticipated? And most fundamentally, has the economic
recovery become more tenuous?
We don’t think so, but I think it’s fair to say that there are some hairline cracks in
our confidence.
One important factor encouraging us in the view that the recovery remains on
track was the news from the labor market. The improvement in labor market
conditions still appears to be proceeding at only a measured pace, but a range of
indicators continue to suggest that it is, in fact, proceeding: Private payroll
employment increased nearly 200,000 per month, on average, during the first quarter,
up from an average of roughly 150,000 per month in the preceding quarter. The
unemployment rate edged down another tenth in March to 8.8 percent, and for the
next few months we have it essentially following the same trajectory that we foresaw
in the March Tealbook. Initial claims for unemployment insurance benefits in the
past several weeks have flattened out in the neighborhood of 400,000; at that level,
they (as well as other indicators such as hiring plans and help-wanted indexes) are
broadly consistent with payroll employment gains continuing during the next few
months at about their recent pace. Informed by these data, we left our forecast for
employment gains in the second quarter unrevised from our previous projection.
Another source of generally encouraging news about the pace of the recovery was
the industrial sector. Manufacturing IP increased at a robust 9 percent pace in the
April 26–27, 2011
93 of 244
first quarter, and the gains were relatively widespread across industries. Moreover,
apart from the disruptions to motor vehicle production associated with the earthquake
in Japan, the available hints about manufacturing activity in the second quarter are
mostly bright. The IP data are reassuring because they derive from a measurement
apparatus that is essentially independent of the one that is used to estimate real GDP;
moreover, manufacturing still accounts for a little more than a tenth of the value
added in the overall economy, and for about half of the volatility of overall output. If
a more-deep-seated cyclical weakening were under way, it might well leave an
imprint in these data. Thus far, they continue to look solid.
Finally, I would note that our forecast of gross domestic income—in principle, a
different way of measuring the same underlying concept as gross domestic product—
is still running at a more robust 3½ percent pace in the first quarter, essentially
unrevised from the March Tealbook—a tenuous bit of evidence, to be sure, but
suggestive that the latest reading on real GDP may be understating the forward
momentum of the economic recovery.
All told, we interpreted the range of evidence as suggesting that the greater
weakness in the first half of this year is mostly concentrated in a few specific sectors,
and reflects some forces that may be imposing even greater restraint in those sectors
than had earlier seemed evident.
One case in point is the housing sector. Although the inventory of unsold new
homes is historically low, the tidal wave of other properties becoming available for
sale is large and looks unlikely to subside materially any time soon. A remarkable
fact is that roughly half of all sales of single-family homes recently have involved
distressed properties—that is, homes that were either in possession of the lender or
involved in a short sale. Banks and others disposing of these properties appear
willing to take relatively steep price discounts in return for being rid of them.
Although these distressed properties are not perfect substitutes—this was written
before the “substitution” dialogue today—for newly built homes, they are substitutes
nonetheless, and their presence in the marketplace appears to be putting substantial
downward pressure on the prices of and demand for new homes. We responded to
the intermeeting news by flattening out considerably the trajectory of our singlefamily-starts forecast. By the end of 2012, single-family starts in our current forecast
are no higher than they were in the third quarter of 2008, long after the collapse of the
sector was well in train.
A roughly similar story obtains for the nonresidential construction sector. Higher
energy prices are supporting more investment in drilling and mining structures, but
elsewhere, the still-high vacancy rates for retail and office space, among others, are
driving investment down even more steeply than we had expected.
The surprisingly steep drop in state and local government investment spending
during the first quarter—nearly 14 percent at an annual rate—suggests that the budget
pressures under which these jurisdictions are operating is even greater than we had
April 26–27, 2011
94 of 244
thought. Furthermore, state and local governments cut jobs in the first quarter at an
average rate of 28,000 per month, again somewhat worse than we had expected.
Although I put consumer spending in a favorable light earlier, I will mention one
cloud behind the silver lining. In particular, the prices for energy and food seem to be
weighing on sentiment—and by enough, we estimate, to take a couple of additional
tenths out of the growth of real PCE over the next few quarters.
All that said, we still think the basic ingredients of the recovery remain in place.
The accommodative stance of monetary policy, the waning of the negative wealth
effects, the eventual improvement in the availability of credit to bank-dependent
customers and, importantly, continued gradual improvement in labor market
conditions should give the recovery some additional traction over the medium run.
The recovery may be proceeding a little more slowly than we had earlier diagnosed,
but we still see the analysis that we gave in the March Tealbook of the dynamics
driving the recovery as a reasonable working hypothesis.
As we discussed in the Tealbook, we continue to see the risks around our
projections for the growth of real GDP and the unemployment rate as elevated
relative to the standard of the past 20 years, and the risks around our projection as
reasonably balanced.
On the inflation front, most of the news we received during the intermeeting
period was a little higher than we were anticipating, and in response, we made a small
adjustment to our outlook. Regarding core inflation, prices for motor vehicles came
in higher than we had expected in both February and March. The likelihood that
inventories will become even leaner may put further upward pressure on these prices
in coming months. Indeed, some of the motor vehicle manufacturers have already
announced upcoming price increases and reduced incentives. More broadly, we think
goods prices are being pushed up some by the slightly faster-than-anticipated
increases in import prices, services prices in earlier months were revised up, and retail
energy prices appear on track to rise even a few percentage points faster during the
first half of this year than the sharp increases we had already been expecting. None
of these upward revisions have large implications for core inflation taken alone, but
they all lean in the same direction.
We gave these developments some persistence into next year based on the fact
that in many of our model specifications, inflation appears to have some intrinsic
momentum. That is, even after controlling for inflation expectations, there seems to
be some carryover of inflation from one period to the next. Commonly, for example,
empirical implementations of the now-conventional New Keynesian Phillips curve
include both a forward-looking term explicitly identified with inflation expectations
and a backward-looking term that might reflect a variety of factors such as costly
price adjustment or the use of backward-looking rules of thumb by some firms in
setting their prices. Regardless of its source, the empirical regularity implies that the
slightly faster pace of core inflation this year should leave some imprint next year as
well.
April 26–27, 2011
95 of 244
Based on these considerations, we boosted our forecast of core PCE inflation both
this year and next by 0.2 percentage point, to 1.4 percent.
As for headline PCE inflation, factoring in the direct effects of the incoming data
on domestic retail energy and food prices brought our forecast for topline PCE
inflation this year up to 2.2 percent—three-tenths faster than we had projected in the
March Tealbook. Next year, we have food and energy prices decelerating sharply,
essentially in line with available readings from futures markets, and as a result,
topline PCE inflation falls back to 1.2 percent.
It’s a little difficult to compare our inflation outlook with those of outside
forecasters, partly because the most recent available Survey of Professional
Forecasters dates from mid-February, and partly because the Blue Chip survey does
not poll its participants about PCE inflation but focuses instead on the CPI. But it
might be worth noting that our outlook for overall CPI inflation is essentially the
same as the Blue Chip’s forecast for this year and 1 percentage point lower next year.
With regard to core PCE inflation, our projection is a couple of tenths higher than
Macroeconomic Advisers’ for both this year and next, and a couple of tenths lower
than the somewhat dated SPF projection for next year.
Similar to our analysis with regard to real GDP and the unemployment rate, we
continue to see the amount of uncertainty surrounding our inflation projection as
elevated relative to the standard of the past 20 years, and we see the risks around our
forecast as balanced. And now, Nathan will continue our report.
MR. SHEETS. 3 Even as recent readings on economic activity in the United
States have surprised on the downside, data for the foreign economies have come in
somewhat above our expectations. With the notable exception of Japan, industrial
production and PMIs in the advanced economies have generally remained upbeat.
And monthly indicators for the EMEs have also shown strength. We now estimate
that foreign GDP rose at a 4 percent pace in the first quarter, nearly ½ percentage
point more than in our last forecast. Looking ahead, we see foreign growth in the
current quarter dipping to 2¾ percent, down more than ½ percentage point from
March, mainly reflecting the effects of the Japanese earthquake. Thereafter, growth
abroad should recover to a 3½ percent pace, as the rebuilding process in Japan
commences, supply chains normalize, and strong growth in the emerging market
economies continues.
Given the favorable expected performance of foreign activity, coupled with
continued projected depreciation of the dollar (mainly against the emerging market
currencies), we see net exports making a positive contribution to U.S. GDP growth of
roughly ¼ to ½ percentage point on average over the forecast horizon. Notably, our
forecast implies that the trade balance excluding oil imports will turn positive in 2012
for the first time in two decades, marking an important milestone for U.S. external
adjustment.
3
The materials used by Mr. Sheets are appended to this transcript (appendix 3).
April 26–27, 2011
96 of 244
In addition to the tragic human dimensions of the Japanese earthquake and
tsunami, the disaster also damaged physical capital amounting to roughly 3 to
5 percent of GDP, including 10 to 15 percent of the country’s electricity generation
capacity. While most large Japanese factories have resumed production, they are
generally operating at levels well below normal. In addition, production of certain
specialized components, especially those needed for some high-tech and automotive
products, remains offline. This shortfall in specialized parts has disrupted production
chains not only in Japan, but also around the world, including—as David has noted—
in the United States. And it is unclear whether the power grid will be able to meet
peak electricity demands this summer, making a resumption of rolling blackouts a
further risk for production. All told, we expect Japanese GDP to decline at an annual
rate of 3½ percent in the current quarter, down 5 percentage points from the March
Tealbook. Going forward, rebuilding efforts should eventually spur economic
activity, leaving the level of GDP by the end of next year only slightly lower than in
our last forecast. But suffice it to say that the risks—including the ongoing problems
at the Fukushima power plant—are both substantial and skewed to the downside.
In the euro area, the authorities continue to make uneven progress in their efforts
to resolve the region’s fiscal and financial stresses. In the days before your March
meeting, European leaders agreed in principle to increase the lending capacity of the
European Financial Stability Facility (EFSF) to a full €440 billion, a crucial step
toward putting a sufficient backstop behind Spain. However, these negotiations have
subsequently stumbled, and implementation may not be achieved until well into the
second half of this year.
As a more encouraging development, the IMF on April 1 activated its expanded
New Arrangements to Borrow, which increases the fund’s available lending capacity
from roughly €130 billion to €300 billion. Not all of these resources can—or
should—be used to fight crises in Europe, but the fund now has additional resources
to finance programs for the peripheral countries should the need arise.
Also in early April, the Portuguese authorities—faced with sizable debt
repayments over the next few months and soaring financing costs—requested an
EU-IMF assistance package, which will likely be sized at somewhere around
€60 billion to €100 billion. Assuming that this program is successfully concluded, we
see this move as an important step forward, as it reduces the risk of a full-blown crisis
in Portugal, which could in turn create contagion for Spain and the other peripherals.
Over the past couple of weeks, the possibility of Greek debt restructuring was
highlighted by public statements from German officials, including the Finance
Minister. ECB officials sharply countered, arguing that a restructuring would have
devastating consequences for both Greece and other countries in Europe. Our
analysis has shown for some time that Greece’s debt burden is unsustainable, but we
do see a case for delaying the restructuring for a while longer in order to put in place
a more compelling firewall around Spain and to provide scope for other countries to
decouple from Greece. In any event, as Brian Sack has noted, debt spreads for
Greece and Portugal spiked upward during the intermeeting period, while those for
April 26–27, 2011
97 of 244
Italy and Spain were little changed. This apparent decoupling is an encouraging sign,
but there is still much work for the European authorities to do. Two key steps are,
first, as I noted earlier, the expansion of the EFSF and, second, the successful
completion of bank stress tests in June.
The paths of oil and non-fuel commodity prices in the April Tealbook are on
balance little changed from those in March, as prices declined sharply in the
aftermath of the Japanese earthquake but subsequently rebounded. However, just as I
was getting ready to take a victory lap to celebrate the accuracy of our forecast, the
price of oil moved up appreciably late last week. With this further upward lurch, the
spot price of WTI is now nearly $7 per barrel higher than in the March Tealbook.
This increase has largely reflected the continued disruption of Libyan production.
Contrary to earlier reports, recent evidence suggests that Saudi Arabia has not
increased production to offset this shortfall. Indeed, last week the Saudi oil minister
stated that the Kingdom’s production was down 800,000 barrels per day in March.
The rising trajectory of commodity prices has pushed inflation higher in countries
around the world, prompting monetary policy tightening by many central banks.
Notably, despite the ongoing turmoil in the periphery, the ECB in early April nudged
its policy rate ¼ percentage point higher, in response to headline inflation well above
its 2 percent ceiling and solid performance among the core countries (particularly
Germany). The Bank of England has not yet moved, but with headline inflation
hovering at 4 percent and signs that inflation expectations may be drifting upward, we
expect a hike there as well over the next few months. In addition, many EME central
banks have continued to tighten monetary policy in response to concerns of
overheating. These moves have been coupled in some cases with moderate currency
appreciations, and in Brazil, Indonesia, and Korea with additional capital control
measures, as capital flows into the EMEs appear to have picked up again in recent
weeks after showing softness through much of this year.
As promised, the International Finance division has launched an intensified
research program examining the behavior of commodity prices. Although this is very
much work in progress, I would like to provide you with an early look at what we are
finding. To date, we have confirmed the broadly held view that, relative to a random
walk, the forecasting properties of the futures curves are typically limited, at best.
However, we have also found that during times when the futures curves exhibit
considerable slope (such as when the economy is emerging from a recession), futures
prices have often contained meaningful predictive information.
Perhaps more importantly, we are also getting a better handle on how movements
in underlying fundamentals—and, in particular, how surprises in those
fundamentals—influence the evolution of commodity prices. The exhibit that I have
distributed to you focuses on this issue. The top two panels of the exhibit document
what you already know well: Futures markets were surprised again and again by
higher commodity prices over the period of 2003 to 2008. In each of those years, the
futures curves for both oil (on the left) and copper (on the right) suggested flat or
declining prices going forward, even as spot prices continued to march upward.
April 26–27, 2011
98 of 244
But my colleagues David Bowman and Joseph Gruber have observed that these
upward surprises in commodity prices came in step with corresponding upward
surprises regarding the strength of emerging Asian economic growth. As shown in
the bottom panels, consensus forecasts of the long-term growth rates of industrial
production in China and in the rest of emerging Asia also were consistently revised
upward over this period. As we have noted previously, these emerging Asian
economies accounted for much of the increased consumption of oil and other
commodities over the past decade. In addition, on the supply side, forecasts of world
oil production and copper extraction have tended to surprise analysts on the
downside, falling short of projections over the past decade. This work underscores
the role of fundamentals in explaining commodity prices, but it also finds that
movements in commodity prices are driven by surprises in growth, more than by the
pace of growth per se. This suggests that it may be fruitful to adjust the futures
curves to account for differences between staff forecasts of global growth, exchange
rates, and other relevant variables and the private forecasts that implicitly underpin
these curves. We have not yet fully tested whether this approach would in fact
produce commodity price forecasts that have improved forecasting properties, but it
would at least yield projections that were directly conditioned on the staff’s outlook.
We plan to have more to say about these issues by the time of the June FOMC
meeting. Fabio will now continue our presentation.
MR. NATALUCCI. 4 I will be referring to the package labeled “Material for
Briefing on FOMC Participants’ Economic Projections.” Exhibit 1 depicts the broad
contours of your current projections for 2011 through 2013 and over the longer run.
As shown, you continue to expect a gradual economic recovery over the next three
years, with GDP growth—the top panel—picking up modestly for this year as a
whole and accelerating further in 2012 and a bit more in 2013, while the
unemployment rate—the second panel—slowly trends lower. With regard to
inflation—the bottom two panels—although you anticipate that total PCE inflation
will move up this year, you project this increase to be temporary, with headline
inflation moving back in line with core inflation in 2012 and 2013. However, you
generally see core inflation gradually edging higher over the next two years.
Exhibit 2 reports the central tendencies and ranges of your projections for 2011
through 2013 and over the longer run; the corresponding information about your
January projections is indicated in italics, and the current and January Tealbook
projections are included as memo items. On balance, your forecasts for this meeting
point to somewhat lower GDP growth and slightly higher inflation over the forecast
period than you projected at the time of the January meeting. In your forecast
narratives, almost all of you indicated that these changes were the result of weakerthan-expected incoming data and higher commodity prices. A number of you also
pointed to greater odds of a tighter stance of fiscal policy during the forecast period.
All of you marked down your projections for real GDP growth this year, with the
central tendency of your estimates, shown in the top panel, noticeably lower than in
January: Most of you now anticipate that real GDP will increase about 3 to
4
The materials used by Mr. Natalucci are appended to this transcript (appendix 4).
April 26–27, 2011
99 of 244
3¼ percent in 2011, versus nearly 3½ to 4 percent in the previous forecast. By
contrast, the revisions to your growth forecasts for 2012 and 2013 were modest: You
continue to see the recovery strengthening, with the pace of real GDP growth
stepping up to about 3½ to 4¼ percent in 2012 and remaining near those rates in
2013. This general pattern of revisions is similar to that reflected in the updates to the
Tealbook forecast since January.
Your unemployment rate projections are summarized in the second panel.
Reflecting the decline in the unemployment rate in recent months, nearly all of you
lowered your forecast for the average unemployment rate in the fourth quarter of this
year, with the central tendency of your projections for 2011 at roughly 8½ to
8¾ percent, versus about 8¾ to 9 percent in the previous SEP. Your projections for
2012 and 2013 continue to trace a gradual downward path that is little changed from
the projections submitted in January. Consistent with your expectations of a
relatively moderate economic recovery, most of you project that the unemployment
rate will be about 6¾ to 7¼ percent even in late 2013—still well above the about
5¼ to 5½ percent central tendency of your estimates of the unemployment rate that
would prevail over the longer run in the absence of further shocks (shown in the
right-hand column). This general pattern of revisions is broadly similar to the updates
in the Tealbook forecast since January.
Turning to inflation—the bottom two panels—all of you raised your forecast for
total PCE inflation this year, with the central tendency of your estimates significantly
higher and the dispersion of your projections noticeably wider than in January. Most
of you now anticipate that headline inflation will run about 2 to 2¾ percent this year,
versus about 1¼ to 1¾ percent in your January projections. However, most of you
expect the increase in headline inflation to be temporary, with the central tendency of
your estimates moving down to about 1¼ to 2 percent next year and running about
1½ to 2 percent in 2013, at or below the about 1¾ to 2 percent central tendency of
your estimates of the “mandate consistent” inflation rate shown in the right-hand
column. The central tendencies of your projections for core PCE inflation for 2011
and 2012 have shifted up a bit and now run about 1¼ to 1½ percent this year and
1¼ to 1¾ percent next year before rising to nearly 1½ to 2 percent in 2013. The
Tealbook forecasts for both total and core inflation in 2012 and 2013 are in the lower
part of the central tendency ranges of your projections.
Your longer-run projections—detailed in the column to the right—anticipate that
over time the annual rate of increase in real GDP will converge to about 2½ to
2¾ percent, with an unemployment rate of about 5¼ to 5½ percent and total PCE
inflation between about 1¾ and 2 percent. Of note, the central tendency for your
projections of the unemployment rate in the longer run is now somewhat narrower
than the 5 to 6 percent interval reported in January.
Your final exhibit summarizes your assessments of the uncertainty and risks that
you attach to your projections. As indicated in the two panels on the left-hand side, a
sizable majority of you continue to judge that the levels of uncertainty associated with
your projections for both real GDP and inflation—as well as for the unemployment
April 26–27, 2011
100 of 244
rate (not shown)—are greater than the average levels that have prevailed over the past
20 years.
As shown in the upper-right panel, about half of you continue to view the risks to
output growth as balanced, although a number of you now judge that those risks have
become tilted to the downside. The most frequently mentioned downside risks to
GDP growth included further increases in commodity prices, a tighter-thananticipated stance of fiscal policy, and an even-weaker-than-expected housing sector.
Your assessments of the risks attending your inflation projection—shown in the
bottom-right panel—have shifted noticeably to the upside, reflecting concerns about
further increases in commodity prices, a potential rise in inflation expectations, and
the possibility that the current highly accommodative stance of monetary policy will
be maintained for too long. These concerns, along with the upward revisions to your
projections for inflation that I noted earlier, help explain why many of you believe
that the Committee should begin to remove monetary policy accommodation earlier
than is assumed in the Tealbook. This concludes my prepared remarks.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Questions for our colleagues? President
Fisher.
MR. FISHER. I have two questions for Nathan. We are still accommodative. The Brits
appear to have stopped, but, as you mentioned, the Europeans are tightening and others are
tightening. What do the Europeans see that we don’t see? In your opinion, is it a difference in
mandates, or do they see the world differently?
MR. SHEETS. I think it’s a variety of factors. The difference in mandate and
perspective may be a bit of it. But the real challenge for the ECB is the heterogeneity of
performance and what the ECB Governing Council is trying to do is trying to balance this. The
German economy is just absolutely performing at an extraordinary pace. Unemployment there in
February actually fell to 6.3 percent, so they are getting to a point where unemployment is almost
3 percentage points lower than when the crisis started. And Germany is 30 percent of the
euro-area economy. So you have the vast majority of that economy performing at a pretty solid
pace and where slack is more limited. And then you’ve got a fraction of the economy that is
struggling in extraordinary ways. But, you know, putting that into perspective, Portugal, Ireland,
April 26–27, 2011
101 of 244
and Greece together amount to roughly 6 to 7 percent of GDP in the euro area. So it is very
small; it’s just a small fraction of Germany.
We have looked at this by a variety of metrics, and it seems like where they are is
reasonable based at least on one benchmark Taylor rule. So I think that the differences really
equate to differences in economic conditions between the United States and the euro area. But
then I think, as a secondary factor, there are some differences in perspective and mandate that
also are having an effect.
MR. FISHER. Mr. Chairman, when we talk about our U.S. situation, one of the
restraining factors we envision on inflationary pressures, even though we revised our numbers
upward, is our amount of slack, and particularly significant unemployment. So I’m wondering,
Nathan, if you would describe to us how much slack you see outside the United States. And,
how well and how able are we to measure global slack?
MR. SHEETS. Okay. Well, to answer your second question first, our ability to measure
global slack is very, very limited. We do our best; we have some benchmark estimates, but there
are huge confidence bands around our estimates. But our sense is that right now activity for the
emerging market economies is pretty well close to what our best guess of potential is. And for
what it is worth, we have sort of massaged some of the IMF estimates. That said, our estimate of
slack and what the IMF is seeing are not that different. For the major emerging market
economies, output is approaching potential. Then, as I described, the situation in Europe is that
the vast majority of that economy is performing pretty well, but then you’ve got this
extraordinarily soft spot where, frankly, I don’t even know how to begin to think about what the
output gap is—in Spain, for instance, where you’ve got a 20 percent unemployment rate, or in
Ireland. I do believe that there’s a fair amount of slack in the United Kingdom, but, on the other
April 26–27, 2011
102 of 244
hand, you’ve got offsets there with inertia in the inflation process that I don’t fully understand.
And then, Canada seems to be performing very strongly.
So my sense is that, for the global economy as a whole, there is still a little bit of slack
mainly in certain industrial countries, but the global economy is performing very well, and the
amount of slack is diminishing.
MR. FISHER. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Again, for Nathan. At least if you’ve
followed the press, there has been an intensifying discussion of Chinese inflation and their
tightening. Do you see any concern that they will actually have to tighten enough to materially
slow down their growth rate?
MR. SHEETS. Chinese inflation has been creeping upward. The latest reading was
5½ percent, 12-month change, which is higher than what they are comfortable with. The
Chinese authorities are moving their monetary policy, both interest rates and reserve
requirements, as well as a number of the quantitative tools that they have—maybe these days we
would call them macroprudential instruments; previously, we would have called them
interventions in the economy [laughter]—to try to rein in credit. And it seems like that they are
having some success. So our baseline forecast for China is one where the Chinese economy
slows to 8 or 8½ percent, and inflation comes down some, but, as you point out, I would say
there are both upside and downside risks around that forecast. It may be that the economy
doesn’t slow as much as we think it will, and then the authorities will really have to put on the
brakes. That could generate an outcome there of sharper slowing than what we expect.
April 26–27, 2011
103 of 244
That said, the Chinese authorities have been faced with these kinds of problems a number
of times over the last decade, and each time have been successful in guiding the economy onto
the smooth-landing course, and that is our expectation again. If something different happened
there, then our outlook for the global economy would be quite a bit different. We really are
getting to a point where China is becoming another engine of global economic growth, and
without it we would have a softer global outlook than what I’ve discussed.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I have a question about the debt
ceiling. As noted in the Tealbook, it appears that investors are still pretty sanguine that some
kind of deal will be reached, and that the debt ceiling will be raised by July. In my own thinking,
though, I see this as being a risk that we should take account of. I was wondering what the staff
perceives to be the economic and financial risks or consequences if the debt ceiling really isn’t
raised.
MR. SACK. As I mentioned in my briefing, I think the markets are very sanguine about
the debt ceiling issue. It’s hard to find any evidence that they are anticipating a significant
problem. I mentioned the Treasury bill curve, which doesn’t show any effects. Implied
volatility of long rates has come down.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Markets have been wrong, though, before.
MR. SACK. Well, my point was going to be that many of us are surprised that there is
not a bit more concern. I think it’s uncertain how the Treasury would deal with the situation.
We know they have a set of tools that they would employ. But if pushed to the brink, there is the
question of what other steps they may take to be able to service the debt.
April 26–27, 2011
104 of 244
If it went to the worst-case scenario where there was actually a default-type event on U.S.
Treasury debt, I think it would be a significant market event. And the effects would be in the
directions you would expect—a bigger risk premium priced into the Treasury curve, a weaker
dollar, and downward pressure on U.S. asset prices if foreign investors and others reevaluate the
situation here. So I think it could be consequential if we got there, but certainly our hope and
expectation is that we won’t end up there.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Other questions? [No response] Okay. Seeing none, I
understand now the coffee is ready, so why don’t we take a 20-minute break and be back at
3:25 p.m.
[Coffee break]
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Hope that was refreshing. We are ready for our goround on the economy, and we’ll start with President Evans.
MR. EVANS. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. My business contacts continue to report good
economic fundamentals, similar to our March meeting. Despite the projected first-quarter GDP
growth rate of 1.7 percent, there were very few indications of slower momentum in growth. My
manufacturing contacts continue to be upbeat. Only the auto sector suggested a temporary
slowing in growth prospects due to the supply chain disruptions from the Japanese difficulties.
Labor markets are continuing to improve. With regard to pricing, there are many reports of firstround price increases due to higher energy and commodity costs. At the moment, second-round
effects seem minimal.
Turning to the national outlook, I had been relatively optimistic about economic growth
prospects. At our previous meetings this year, I indicated that I expected GDP to grow about
4 percent in 2011 and 2012. We don’t appear to be seeing that kind of pace in the first half of
April 26–27, 2011
105 of 244
this year, but as of today, I don’t see a fundamental change in economic momentum. So I think
the 4 percent mark is a good projection for the second half of 2011 and for 2012. That puts us
broadly in line with the Tealbook.
That said, this is the second time we are facing a period of sluggish growth following the
trough of the 2008–09 recession. Suppose first-quarter GDP growth comes in at the Tealbook’s
1.7 percent projection. I’d see that as a reminder that achieving escape velocity from our
liquidity-trap conditions is still not a slam dunk. We shouldn’t forget that a successful launch
must still overcome a number of significant headwinds. Households have lost a lot of net worth
and now face a hit to purchasing power from higher gasoline prices. Both of these limit the
scope for a sustainable pop in consumer spending. Housing’s contribution to this recovery is
AWOL, and nonresidential construction isn’t doing much better. And state and local
governments are still trimming expenditures and payrolls. Indeed, listing these headwinds also is
a reminder of why we are writing down 4 percent growth numbers instead of the 5-plus numbers
that we’d like to see following a very deep hole from the recession.
In terms of inflation, the U.S. economy is being hit by substantial relative price changes
from global economic forces with respect to food, energy, and commodity prices. We likely are
going to see some larger quarterly numbers for inflation in the first half of the year, but the key
question centers on the medium term. What PCE inflation are we likely to see in 2012 and
beyond? Clearly, we do have a large amount of monetary accommodation in place, which makes
many nervous about rising inflation. However, it would be quite unusual for inflationary
momentum to build in the absence of rising labor costs and wages. I know there are
disagreements around the table, but I still see the evidence favoring the view that a substantial
April 26–27, 2011
106 of 244
degree of resource slack is holding back inflationary pressures. I think it’s important to defend
this view vigorously, and I’d like to do that now. [Laughter]
Theoretical and empirical research objections have been leveled at this kind of analysis.
These often note the unobserved nature of output gaps and resource slack. By my reckoning,
Presidents Plosser, Kocherlakota, Lacker, and Bullard have spoken on this issue, and I suppose I
should add President Fisher after today’s reminder. In addition, President Lacker has often
voiced skepticism of numerous statistical relationships between observable variables and
inflation. As I understand the context of such comments, these correlations are uninformative for
policy due to the endogeneity of the variables. There is a literature on this.
I would like to report some results from my staff’s work with DSGE models that attempt
to pin down the exogenous factors that are influencing inflation dynamics. In the policy debate
over statistical correlations, economic structure, and truly exogenous factors, this is a clearly
useful way to proceed. It is in line with the research program articulated by Lucas, Sargent, and
others.
The Chicago research model builds on my 2005 Journal of Political Economy article
with Christiano and Eichenbaum, and if you like the discipline of peer-reviewed work, you have
to love this one because we spent over five years in that review process. [Laughter] The
Chicago model is estimated on data over the period from 1987 to 2008 and has many desirable
attributes that allow it to describe quite well the quarter-to-quarter movements in macroeconomic
data. Here is the recent policy development: The model has been surprised by the increase in
core inflation over the past six months. The forecast error for core inflation relative to what we
thought six months ago is about ¼ percentage point higher on a year-over-year basis. Coming
over two quarters, that’s a substantial increase. In studying the model’s results, it seems to be
April 26–27, 2011
107 of 244
struggling with the apparent softer growth in productivity as well as the increase in core
inflation.
What factors account for these developments? In the model, part of the rise in inflation
reflects announcement effects of our continued accommodative forward guidance for monetary
policy. That was an objective of our asset purchase program. In addition, the Chicago model
sees four other exogenous factors as important in explaining these observations. The first factor
is that a small, adverse, neutral technology shock has hit the economy. In the model, this will
reduce output and productivity growth and increase inflation. This is a potentially troubling
shock because it imparts inflation persistence. That is, it has staying power, and I was nervous
when the staff showed me this development.
The second factor captures an exogenous increase in households’ willingness to supply
labor and is also persistent. In the model, this increases both hours and output while productivity
falls due to diminishing returns in production. But here, inflation is lower, due to lower marginal
costs. The net effect of these first two shocks leaves productivity growth lower, as the data have
shown recently. The initial rise in inflation is somewhat smaller when both factors are accounted
for: The technology shock was up; the labor supply shock was down.
The last two exogenous factors that the model finds important in explaining the data are
transitory shocks to the markups on prices and wages. These shocks boost core inflation but
have only a temporary effect. These are the types of shocks that give rise to commentary in past
Tealbooks, like: “We think the movement down or up in core inflation was temporary and
unrelated to resource slack or other fundamentals.”
Our final model analysis finds a substantial and constructive role for these transitory
shocks. So, summing across all of these recent developments has interesting implications for the
April 26–27, 2011
108 of 244
time path of the Chicago DSGE model’s inflation forecast. The model’s projection for core
inflation over the four quarters of 2011 is higher at 1.6 percent. But core inflation falls to a bit
under 1.0 percent in 2012 and 2013.
What’s my bottom line here from the DSGE model? My staff’s analysis of the
exogenous factors indicates that a good portion of the recent run-up in core inflation is likely to
be transitory, and I didn’t refer to resource slack or output gaps once. The model analysis is in
terms of exogenous factors. Changes in pricing pressures work through variations in marginal
costs, a fundamental economic concept. That recent inflation developments are most likely
transitory is also a robust finding from analysis of recent inflation and term structure data. That
is, this conclusion is also supported by a modern finance model we run that produces inflation
forecasts from no-arbitrage affine models of the term structure of interest rates.
These implied inflation forecasts also revised up a good deal in the near term, but they
are only up a tenth or two in 2012 and still just reach 1.4 percent by 2013. This is analysis of
market data with state-of-the-art term structure finance modeling. This model allows for
feedback from energy prices to core but finds that feedback to be very small, which is also
consistent with the alternative but complementary VAR evidence I discussed at our March
meeting. Furthermore, this assessment also aligns well with our standard battery of Stock-andWatson-style statistical models, which continue to forecast very low core inflation throughout
the projection period. As it turns out, the endogeneity issue didn’t disturb the result as it aligns
with the structural model analysis.
We in Chicago have searched high and low for research-quality evidence on the nature of
the inflation persistence over our projection period using a variety of state-of-the-art models.
Taking into account recent developments, it continues to be exceedingly difficult to find
April 26–27, 2011
109 of 244
analytical research-based evidence that inflation is about to overshoot our target over the
medium term. Consequently, I feel quite comfortable that my views, which lean strongly toward
continued substantial accommodation, are well within the mainstream of modern
macroeconomic and monetary research. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I’m going to focus mostly on anecdotal
reports from the Sixth District, and those anecdotal reports that I’ve recently received from
directors and other contacts are more positive than the tenor of the incoming data. While these
contacts acknowledge that the pace of economic activity weakened in the first quarter, there has
been no significant falloff in business confidence about the outlook since the last meeting. In
many cases we are getting reports that suggest a stronger economy than the macro numbers
would indicate, and this is puzzling considering the incoming numbers.
On the positive side, manufacturing activity remains quite strong in the District,
consistent with the national numbers. The strength in auto manufacturing, in spite of some
rescheduling associated with Japan-based supply chains, heavily influences this perception.
Transportation- and logistics-related businesses continue to experience very strong demand.
Tourism is strong in Florida and other tourist areas in the Southeast, helped in part by
international visitors. Convention business is returning nicely, which is taken as a sign of
improving confidence in the economy. This has spurred a significant increase in capital
expenditures in the tourism sector.
On the more negative side, housing markets in my District remain distressed with no
clear signs of improvement, but, at the same time, with not a lot of deterioration. Perhaps more
noteworthy, some retailers reported a falloff in sales as the quarter proceeded. One large home-
April 26–27, 2011
110 of 244
improvement retailer has measured fewer visits, which is attributed to shoppers reducing their
outings to save on gasoline. And there is acknowledgement that poor weather, of course, in the
early part of the quarter affected first-quarter numbers.
Overall, however, retail sales in the District appear to be up modestly from the last
meeting. In our monthly survey of Sixth District retailers, the majority of respondents reported a
slight increase in both sales and traffic in March. About three-fourths of them indicated that they
expect sales to increase in the coming months, and overall sentiment continues to be positive.
Consistent with the measured optimism expressed in most of our conversations, we did
not as of yet detect any widespread backing-off of investment plans. However, our director that
represents the large retailer that I mentioned earlier did note that cap-ex budgets would have to
be cut if the decline in the pace of activity that they’re experiencing persists much longer, and
many of our directors agreed. So in this instance, I did pick up some wavering on the outlook.
Labor markets in my District appear to have firmed a little. Demand for workers has
improved in line with the pickup in hiring nationally. I think it’s a reasonable thesis, broadly
speaking, that firms have pushed productivity enhancements close to their limit and are now
reaching the point of needing new workers to keep expansion going. In our first-quarter survey
of small businesses, 42 percent of respondents reported that they expect to add workers over the
next six months, up from 29 percent at year-end. Views on wages and on wage pressures have
shifted slightly. Wage and benefit pressures have moved from neutral or even downward to
moderately upward. We did hear greater concern about talent retention, and I note that the NFIB
and the Duke CFO survey in March showed upticks in the wage–cost outlook.
Our contacts continue to voice concern over cost pressures, especially material costs
deriving from commodities. What is noteworthy is how broad-based these material cost
April 26–27, 2011
111 of 244
pressures seem to be. We are hearing some concern that margins are tightening and are
projected to tighten, and that pass-through inhibitions are weakening.
Chief among the commodity prices, of course, are oil and fuel. I see the direction of oil
prices as a major swing factor in economic performance for at least the near term. Based on
so-called expert analysis, if there is such a thing, and conversations with knowledgeable
observers of developments in the Middle East, I think there is no better working assumption than
the one that oil prices have leveled off but will remain elevated near current levels for some time.
The possibility of a spike from current price levels represents a significant downside risk to my
outlook.
Our District-level soundings suggest to me that the economy is at something of a pivotal
juncture. Gasoline prices and energy prices more generally will influence the evolution of the
economy in the near term. Right now the general sentiment seems to be that the negative
influence of higher energy prices is likely to be transitory, but this view is cautiously held, and
there is a sense that the prevailing optimism about the balance of the year is fragile.
As I said, anecdotal reports I’ve heard seem mostly inconsistent with professional
interpretation of incoming data and are in tension with the results of our recent model runs. The
suite of models that we ran in preparation for this meeting almost uniformly suggest a downward
revision to our 2011 growth outlook on the order of ½ to ¾ percentage point, and this is similar
to the downward adjustment of the Tealbook baseline. In my forecast submission, however, I
decided to give some weight to the economic intelligence we’re getting from our contacts. So
I’m holding to the view that the economy is on a moderate growth path, and that the slowdown
in the first quarter suggested by the incoming data is really an initial shock effect that will not
persist. This is to say that the fundamentals have not changed that much.
April 26–27, 2011
112 of 244
As regards the balance of risks, I see the risk to economic growth to the downside
connected to the risk of a further oil price shock. My assessment of the inflation risks is clearly
weighted to the upside. Although expectations remain in the territory reasonably described as
“anchored,” expectations have drifted higher and are at the top of the recent historical range.
Despite exceptionally high rates of unemployment, wage growth seems to be firming. This,
along with the drumbeat from businesses that inflationary pressures continue to build, raise some
concern on my part that we may not be able to count on inflation expectations as a restraining
influence on underlying inflation. Although normally one would think of these two risks, the oil
price shock to growth and the inflation risk, as moving against each other, in my view there is a
scenario where we get higher inflation and a weaker economy. But this is not my base-case
outlook, and, as I said, that outlook holds to a moderate-growth path with a slight backup on the
full-year growth estimate and tame core inflation measures for the forecast horizon. Thank you,
Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Rosengren.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. The judgment on the data since our last
meeting is a split decision. Labor markets are improving, albeit slowly, but spending is slower
than I expected. Most of the good news has come from the labor markets. Payroll employment
in recent months is growing at a rate consistent with a gradual decline in the unemployment rate.
The unemployment rate has fallen a full percentage point over the past four months, to
8.8 percent, lower than I expected last fall.
This improvement in the labor market is still not affecting labor costs, with wages and
salaries growing quite slowly. The quiescence in wages and salaries is consistent with
substantial slack in the labor market. This assessment of slack is consistent with the significant
April 26–27, 2011
113 of 244
revision in the JOLTS data, which now show many fewer vacancies over the past five years.
The revision was primarily a result of reestimating the birth-death model, which had
overestimated the number of new firms and job openings being created during the crisis. The
very low quit rate also suggests that considerable slack remains in the labor market. A worker
concerned about the outlook would be reticent to quit a job for fear of the inability to secure
better employment elsewhere. While the quit rate has risen off its lows, it remains substantially
below its level after the last recession. With existing workers reticent to move and the low
participation rate indicating that opportunities are not attracting workers back into the labor
market, we need much more improvement in labor markets than we have seen to date.
While progress in labor markets has been slower than I hoped but more than I forecast,
recent data on spending have been slower than I hoped and less than I forecast. GDP growth
over the past four quarters has averaged only 2.8 percent, just slightly above potential. At the
beginning of the year, I had expected growth in the first quarter to be well above potential, but
now it looks as if growth will fall well short of that.
Over the past four months, most forecasters have been revising down their first-quarter
estimate with each new data release. Like many of these forecasters, I have been surprised by
weaker-than-expected consumption, housing, and state and local spending. A key question is:
Given the surprise in incoming data and the likelihood of more fiscal tightening than I originally
expected, how much of this weakness should be carried into future quarters? While I’m
assuming that this is a lull rather than a trend, the strength in spending for this year is in the
forecast but has yet to be reflected in the data.
Despite the significant food and energy shocks, my estimate of core inflation, like that of
the Tealbook, remains well below 2 percent over the forecast period. I focus on core inflation
April 26–27, 2011
114 of 244
because over the period from 1985 to the present, whenever total inflation has diverged from
core inflation, total has tended to return to core, perhaps consistent with well-anchored
expectations. While we need to continue to monitor inflation expectations and inflation trends,
the evidence to date is consistent with inflation over the forecast horizon remaining under 2
percent.
Like the Tealbook, my forecast has an unemployment rate at the end of 2013 well above
full employment, and core and total PCE inflation well below 2 percent. However, my forecast
achieves this outcome with a federal funds rate that remains at the zero bound longer than
assumed in the Tealbook. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Fisher.
MR. FISHER. Mr. Chairman, economic growth in our regional economy appears to be
accelerating, and, notwithstanding some soft spots, we think that the Eleventh District is about to
turn in its best performance since 2007. Our payroll employment grew at a 2.6 percent rate in
the first quarter and at a 3.6 percent rate in March, and on almost every front we have significant
activity, including multifamily construction and rents that are on the rise across the Texas
metropolitan areas. We’ve been assisted by robust economic growth in Mexico, which is
growing at 4.8 percent.
There are some areas of concern, particularly that input and selling prices are increasing
faster. And as I mentioned last time, we did find a typical Texas way to resolve the budget—by
cutting everything, including education and social services. The joke is, and it’s a horrible one,
that we’ve gone from the electric chair to electric bleachers in Texas. It’s a hideously interesting
way to resolve our program issues.
April 26–27, 2011
115 of 244
From the standpoint of employment growth, as you know, I like to brag on the percentage
of jobs we’ve created as a percentage of the whole in the United States. The good news is, while
we continue to grow, the rest of the United States is catching up with us, and I think it reflects
the comments that have been made at the table.
Bearing in mind the great virtues of modeling and academic precision, I’d like to turn to
the U.S. economy and address three questions that were raised in the domestic briefing. One is
that employment is proceeding. Second, GDP may be understating the momentum of the
economy, a point that I believe President Lockhart made in his presentation. And a very
important point he made is that inflation seems to have some intrinsic momentum. These are the
points that I’m picking up from my anecdotal evidence, and as you know, I do a fairly thorough
survey, to the best of my ability. Mr. Chairman, you know who is on my list. I’d like to
summarize that for the group since we’ve heard a lot of macroeconomic data, but I’d like to
provide for the table the microeconomic inputs.
What was previously a faint theme is now a very loud, uniform drumbeat on two fronts,
according to my interlocutors—that is, the CEOs and CFOs that I talk to across all of our
Districts. The first is that cost inflation is pushing forward price increases in all sectors beyond
energy and basic commodities, and the second is that excess liquidity is giving rise to faster and
looser decisionmaking by financial intermediaries, something that I referenced before. Final
demand is growing, although at a lesser pace, and the reason given by my interlocutors is that
inflation in basic necessities is becoming a factor dampening consumer confidence and
tempering the rate of expansion. The ease with which credit is available is being exploited by
businesses, but it is simultaneously giving rise to trepidation of what might ensue. As one of
them said, we’ve seen this movie before, and just recently.
April 26–27, 2011
116 of 244
To a person—and I mean to a person across all sectors: public, private, large, small,
whatever sector in which they operate—my contacts feel that they and, in general, American
businesses large and small, public and private, have, as President Lockhart pointed out earlier,
achieved tremendous operational efficiency such that they have no fat from which to absorb
widespread and pervasive cost increases, and they must protect their margins by passing these
cost pressures on to consumers. To be sure, they’re not sure how much leeway they have, but it
does alarm me to hear from one interlocutor—whose name I will mention because I think it’s of
value, Bill Simon at Walmart—that Walmart has approved increases. These are not yet
announced, and they’re not for public use. They are to be implemented in the June time frame in
much higher orders of magnitude than I would have expected—for example, dairy products up
15 percent, all Proctor & Gamble products up 5 to 7 percent. As reported in the Wall Street
Journal this morning—I presume everybody reads section B? Nobody reads section B
[laughter]—5 to 7 percent in diapers and tissues from Kimberly Clark; blue jeans up 8 percent.
Walmart is an interesting interlocutor. They force their suppliers to go through their
entire cost structure. In the ugly parlance of one of them, they’re known as the cost proctologists
because they examine absolutely everything. They have concluded, and I quote, “Practically all
of our suppliers’ cost structures have been rationalized. They’ve achieved remarkable operating
efficiencies, which is revealed in the macroeconomic data. They have severely limited room to
absorb broad-based inflation,” end of quote.
An example—a separate retail chain, Michaels, which sells 40,000 products in
1,040 stores in 48 states, is planning price increases of seasonal goods, which is one-third of their
40,000 products, of 8 to 10 percent, and their CEO put it this way: “Commodities will swing up
April 26–27, 2011
117 of 244
and down in price, but wage inflation is real in China, India, Vietnam, and the inherent cost to
manufacture everywhere, including the United States, is going up.”
My smallest contact, John Faulkner, a dry cleaner with 20-odd employees, was almost
offensively blunt in echoing what I heard from everyone in size up to Rex Tillerson at Exxon, or,
say, Burlington Northern, or TI, or AT&T: “I have no problem getting credit or money. That’s
the good news. The bad news is that inflation in all my inputs is killing me. I haven’t increased
wages for my people. I’m sure as heck not going to hire more until I sense my other costs can be
controlled even if bankers pay me to take their money.”
Every CEO I talk to, large or small, public or private, is now budgeting for and managing
to inflation, and I think this addresses your point of the inherent carryover of inflationary
numbers. The question is for how long, and perhaps we could turn to Chicago’s model to get a
sense for that.
As to the effects of excess liquidity on behavior of financial operators, I see only an
intensification of the very disturbing patterns I reported at the last FOMC. Continued
accommodation is encouraging a debasement of prudent credit practices and an enhancement of
speculative impulses, some of which only add to inflationary pressures. I note that in the
Tealbook on page 59, the pace of institutional leveraged loan issuance in the first quarter was
about the same as the pace for the entire year of 2007, and the expected nonfinancial year-ahead
defaults have come down significantly; I note also that they have come down to nearly the same
level that they were in 2007 before all the defaults occurred. As an example, I’ll point to Energy
Future Holdings. You may remember, that’s the electric utility that just refinanced the
$45 billion leverage buyout that was done by KKR, TPG, and Goldman. Their CEO confided in
April 26–27, 2011
118 of 244
me that the covenants in the refinancing they achieved last week were “even better this time than
what we got in 2007.”
I agree that many current inflationary variables may be transitory. I accept that over the
past 25 years inflation expectations have been largely unaffected by commodity price
fluctuations because of the inflation-fighting mindset that we have at the Fed, which is not in
question. I can also understand the reasoning behind the initiation of the current LSAP program.
Even though I did not think it was necessary, I will grant that it has lifted stock prices and
increased investor returns. But here’s the summary point. Based on anecdotal input, for what
it’s worth, I fear that we are, first, on the edge of losing the faith of the business community and
households as to our inflation-fighting resolve—I think that needs to be reemphasized, a very
important part of what you will do tomorrow afternoon, Mr. Chairman—and, second, planting
seeds of financial recklessness, some of which are beginning to sprout. Thank you, Mr.
Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Economic conditions in the Third District
improved moderately over the intermeeting period in all sectors except construction.
Employment in our three states increased at an annual rate of 1.4 percent during the three months
ending in March, comparable to the pace in the nation. The unemployment rate now stands at
8.4 percent, 0.4 percentage point below the national rate.
Pennsylvania has shown considerably more strength than New Jersey, where the
government sector has been shedding jobs at a very rapid pace. The stress on state and local
budgets is probably the biggest risk at this time in our District’s economy: Large budget deficits
loom. In fiscal year 2012, the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities is projecting a budget
April 26–27, 2011
119 of 244
shortfall in Pennsylvania of $4.2 billion, or about 16 percent of the 2011 fiscal year budget, and a
shortfall of $10.5 billion for New Jersey, 37 percent of its budget. Delaware’s is more modest—
a shortfall of only $208 million, about 6.4 percent of its budget.
The region’s manufacturing output continues to increase in April, but to no surprise, it
did pull back from its 30-year high, which is what it was in March, to a more moderate pace, but
still one consistent with continuing modest growth. The indexes of new orders, shipments, and
employment also weakened somewhat this month but still point to continued expansion. Exports
account for a little more than 12 percent of manufacturing output in our District. In response to a
special question, 80 percent of the firms said they haven’t experienced supply disruptions from
the recent crisis in Japan or any other international event. Ten percent indicate they were
currently experiencing some problems, and another 10 percent expressed some concern of
possible future effects. This is something we will continue to monitor, but the effects are
modest.
In the real estate sector, talking to two very large homebuilders suggests that traffic to
date is up significantly over last year this time, and their sales volumes over the first quarter of
this year are well above what they were last year.
We continue to see signs of increasing price pressures on firms who are becoming better
able to pass along their increases to their customers. Although the prices-paid index in our April
survey decreased, it remains at a very, very high level. The prices-received index, though, unlike
the other indexes in April, moved up again; that is eight consecutive months in which the pricesreceived index has risen. Firms are continuing to expect that they will be making further price
increases over the course of the second half of the year.
April 26–27, 2011
120 of 244
In an environment where policy is very accommodative, the key to assuring that
commodity price increases don’t pass through to general inflation is that inflation expectations
remain well anchored, which in turn depends on the credibility of the Fed to deliver on its price
stability mandate.
Core inflation has been accelerating, and the Tealbook has been revising up its forecast.
Forward inflation compensation 5 to 10 years ahead has been moving up, and the Tealbook says
that the staff models indicate that the rise is driven mainly by liquidity and inflation in risk
premiums rather than increases in expected inflation. Unfortunately, I don’t take much comfort
in the fact that inflation risk premiums are rising. I read that as an indication that our credibility
may be less stable than I’d like it to be.
My forecast has not changed much since January. I revised down slightly my economic
growth for the first half of 2011 because of the weaker consumption data we saw in the first
quarter. But I held the second half of 2011 and 2012 roughly the same. I believe the weakness
we have experienced is due to temporary factors, such as the severe weather we had in January
and February, the initial shock from the sharp rise in oil prices, and some supply disruptions
from the earthquake and tsunami in Japan. Financial markets have taken all that potentially bad
news in stride, suggesting that firmer recovery is shaping up. Earnings continue to be strong,
and firms are doing well. I continue to expect output growth in the United States to be slightly
above trend over the next two years, employment growth to strengthen, and the unemployment
rate to move down. I revised up my inflation forecast for this year but expect some reversal of
that increase next year as oil and commodity prices stabilize or perhaps reverse course.
As the economy continues to recover, we will need to begin withdrawing policy
accommodation. Given inflation developments, I think that time may be sooner than what’s
April 26–27, 2011
121 of 244
priced into the federal funds market, which expects the funds rate to increase in the first half of
next year, and very likely sooner than what is in the Tealbook, which assumes no change in the
fed funds rate until the third quarter of next year. My forecast incorporates a steeper policy path,
with a reduction in accommodation beginning sometime in the second half of this year.
Our colleague Tom Hoenig has been saying that even after exit begins, policy will remain
very accommodative for some time to come. I think we should make an effort to explain this to
the public and prepare them for the start of normalization. I have also been sympathetic to his
view that moving away from the zero bound could be very beneficial to the functioning of
financial markets and would not amount to significant tightening as policy would continue, as I
said, to be very accommodative. We have a very good opportunity to convey some of these
ideas over the next two meetings—this meeting and in June—and begin to change our language
substantially, because the Chairman will be holding press briefings at which he can be more
expansive than a one-page statement can be. I think we should take advantage of that
opportunity. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Pianalto.
MS. PIANALTO. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. The incoming data point to a more mixed
picture than I was expecting when we last met. We are again in the position of trying to judge
whether a slowdown early in the year will extend further into the year. Overall, I agree with the
Tealbook that most of the slowdown is transitory. In my remarks, I will focus on how I revised
my projections since our last submission in January.
First, I do see the incoming data as pointing to a surprisingly weak first quarter. Given
the range of weak indicators, I agree with the staff estimate of 1.7 percent GDP growth in the
first quarter. There is no shortage of potential explanations for a softer quarter, ranging from
April 26–27, 2011
122 of 244
severe winter weather to the run-up in oil prices related to the developments in the Middle East
and North Africa.
While much of the softness looks temporary, there is reason to take some signal from the
recent data and expect some additional softness in growth beyond the first quarter. In projections
from our econometric model in Cleveland, rising materials prices play a lead role in slowing the
anticipated pace of GDP growth relative to a few months ago. While I have previously reported
small effects of commodity price changes on GDP growth, in our model, overall materials prices
affect the economy more than commodity prices do. While I don’t anticipate that materials
prices will continue to soar, the increases that we’ve already seen were enough to modestly slow
the projected pace of growth. I should also note that my manufacturing contacts have mentioned
that materials price increases are importantly affecting activity and profit levels, although not
enough to derail growth in their businesses. Putting all of this together, since January I have
pulled down my forecasts for GDP growth for 2011 and 2012 by about ½ percentage point to
around 3 percent in both years.
The one bright spot among an array of disappointing data releases was the April report on
labor market conditions, which confirmed the downward trend in the unemployment rate and
confirmed a pickup in private employment gains. Taking a closer look at the implications of
unemployment for slack in the economy, my staff presented evidence that labor market slack is
not going to go away very quickly. One reason is that despite recent declines, unemployment
remains stubbornly high. A second reason is that, based on historical norms, firms have plenty
of room to increase both hours per week and the number of workers. Finally, the labor force
participation rate is likely to rise as many individuals who would normally be participants in a
stronger economy finally return to the workforce. So while labor markets are improving, there is
April 26–27, 2011
123 of 244
still a lot of slack in labor markets, and therefore, I don’t see wage pressures picking up any time
soon.
Labor market slack aside, the upward drift in core inflation in recent months and the rise
in materials prices have led me to bump up my core inflation projections from my January
submission. I now expect core PCE inflation of about 1¼ percent in 2011 and 1½ percent in
2012.
At our last meeting, there was some discussion about how quickly core inflation can rise
in light of the significant increase in core inflation that surprised the FOMC in 2004. My staff
examined the chances of a similar rise in core inflation in the current environment. To formally
assess this risk for 2011, they relied on a small forecasting model that incorporates current
conditions, which include variability of economic growth and inflation that is somewhat higher
today than it was in 2004. According to that model, even with today’s elevated volatility, the
chance of a significant jump in core inflation, combined with modest GDP growth, is only about
20 percent. Now, clearly, this is enough of a risk to merit paying attention to, but we should not
react too hastily when higher probability outcomes show a more gradual increase in core
inflation. In my view, the chance of a surprise rise in core inflation is much lower today than in
2004, because our economy is much weaker today than it was then. For example, the
unemployment rate is more than 3 percentage points higher than it was in the first quarter of
2004.
On inflation expectations, in the Cleveland Fed model, which accounts for a time-varying
inflation risk premium, inflation expectations are at or below 2 percent out to 14 years. That
said, inflation expectations at horizons of three to five years ahead have risen and are now
similar to the levels they were last spring. After the spring of last year, inflation expectations
April 26–27, 2011
124 of 244
started to drop with the growing signs of weakness in the economy. This was a critical factor in
my decision to support additional asset purchases. So we should not be worried about inflation
expectations at these levels, but I would not want to see them continue to rise.
In my judgment, the risk to the outlook for GDP growth remains balanced. While the
recent weakness in most of the incoming data point to a risk of a sustained soft spot in the
recovery, the surprising strength of employment suggests the potential for a stronger recovery.
On inflation, I think the risks are more to the upside than the downside because of the rise
in input costs and the threat that inflation expectations could move higher in response. Still, the
most likely outcome is a gradual rise in core inflation with moderate GDP growth. Thank you,
Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I have talked to a number of
business contacts throughout the Ninth District over the past six weeks, and the high rate of
headline inflation was very much on their minds. One concern was that elevated oil and food
prices would drive down demand for other goods and so choke off the recovery. But the other
real concern was that headline inflation would leak into what we at the Fed like to term
“underlying inflation” and generate a persistent high-inflation scenario.
In terms of the latter concern, many retailers pointed out that increases in input prices
were putting upward pressures on their costs. However, they remained uncertain about their
ability to pass those cost increases on to consumers. One offered story, though, is that they
believe that the current high rate of headline inflation will give them, quote–unquote, “more
cover” to initiate price increases in nonfood and non-energy goods and services. According to
this story, a firm can raise its prices more rapidly because households believe that all of their
April 26–27, 2011
125 of 244
prices are rising more rapidly. This story would mean that the apparently transitory increase in
headline inflation has the potential to generate a self-fulfilling increase in expectations about
core inflation—a self-fulfilling increase that could well prove to be persistent. This story—that
transitory movements in headline inflation can translate into persistent movements and
inflationary expectations—is one that bears watching. Fortunately, there is little evidence so far
that this upward pressure on longer-term inflationary expectations is happening. For example,
the five-year, five-year forward breakevens remain in historical ranges. The Cleveland Fed’s
measure of expected inflation over the next 10 years, which President Pianalto was just
referencing—I like that, because it attempts to strip away both liquidity and risk premium
affects—has risen since last summer, but it does remain below 2 percent.
So medium-term and longer-term inflation expectations do seem stable for now, but this
risk that the transitory becomes permanent is one that we need to be prepared for. And I’m not
sure that we are. If we look at our standard monetary policy rules, they are silent about how to
respond to changes in longer-run inflationary expectations. What triggers are we using to tell us
that longer-run inflation expectations have risen? Do breakevens need to rise to 3½ percent,
4 percent, 4½ percent? Do the Cleveland Fed measures need to hit 2.2 percent, 2.5 percent?
How aggressive should we be if the economy were to hit these triggers? As far as I can tell, we
don’t have a systematic approach to dealing with this kind of scenario, and I think we do need
one.
In contrast, our policy rules are clear that the level of accommodation should track core
inflation. I took what President Evans was describing from the very interesting work that was
being done in Chicago as proposing not tracking core inflation but some filtered vision of core,
which is trying to tease out the persistent component of core. That would be different from the
April 26–27, 2011
126 of 244
kind of rules we have traditionally been using, and it would be interesting to see if those kinds of
rules, using historical data, would actually perform better than the rules we’ve typically used.
But for now, I think I would rather stick to the rules the Committee has typically used, the ones
that track core. And as a result, and as my memo on reducing accommodation indicated, I am
going to be tracking PCE core inflation carefully in thinking about the appropriate timing for
reducing policy accommodation.
The Tealbook now forecasts that core PCE inflation will be 1.4 percent over 2011. My
own outlook has not changed that much. It continues to be that PCE core inflation will be
1.4 percent or possibly even higher. And our own rules indicate that the FOMC should respond
to that increase in core inflation by raising the fed funds rate. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Williams.
MR. WILLIAMS. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Well, we’ve heard a lot about
disappointing news on the economy. There was some good news that baseball’s regular season
has begun. And as you all know from reports from John Moore, we follow very carefully the
relationship between the U.S. economy and how the San Francisco Giants perform on the field.
Unfortunately, like the U.S. economy, the Giants got off to a lackluster start so far this year, but
these early stumbles haven’t yet caused me to change my assessment that they’ll both perform
well for the remainder of the year.
The recent economic data and the anecdotes I hear from my business contacts have
generally fallen short of expectations in terms of economic activity and suggest upside risks to
inflation. Nonetheless, I still see a moderate recovery in train, with underlying inflation
remaining low. The open question is whether my optimism, both regarding the Giants and the
economy, reflects an accurate reading of fundamentals or just a form of denial. [Laughter]
April 26–27, 2011
127 of 244
Overall, my projection is very similar to that in the Tealbook, with the unemployment
rate falling only gradually over this year and next, and headline and core PCE price index
inflation dipping back down to around 1¼ percent next year as the effects of the surge in
commodity prices recede. I’ll focus my remaining remarks on just two issues. One is the
disappointing tone of recent data that David Wilcox commented on, and the other is the
implications of price increases of oil and other commodities.
First, like the Board staff and most private forecasters—I am taking from what I’ve heard
so far from most people here—we have significantly revised down our forecasts for the first
quarter in response to the weaker-than-expected incoming data but have left our medium-term
forecast largely intact. For me a key question is whether these data might be signaling
significantly less underlying strength in the economy than we’re expecting. In this regard—and
this may be different from what President Lockhart reported—I am struck by how pessimistic
and cautious my business contacts sound these days—much more downbeat than a month ago,
let alone at the beginning of the year. Indeed, they speak of a crisis of confidence among
households who see gasoline prices going up, up, and up, and who everyday read tales of
sovereign default, nuclear meltdown, and war. One homebuilder says he sees no shortage of
qualified, interested buyers, but they are afraid to pull the trigger; they worry that if they lose
their job, they won’t find a new one.
So far, despite the angst I sense from my contacts, I am sticking to the story that the
recent data have been a temporary aberration and that the pace of recovery should get back on
track. In this assessment, I am encouraged by the continued gains in payrolls in the
manufacturing sector and the resilience of consumer spending in the face of significant increases
in food and energy prices. And even though lending conditions still appear relatively tight,
April 26–27, 2011
128 of 244
overall financial conditions have continued to improve. Still, the weakness in recent data and the
lack of confidence I hear from my business contacts raise a red flag of possible downside risks to
the outlook.
Second, prices of oil and other commodities have continued to move up. These are
unwelcome developments both for output and inflation. In terms of output, higher gasoline and
food prices are a drag on household spending. And I’m particularly concerned about how
they’re affecting confidence in line with the crisis-of-confidence views I mentioned earlier.
In terms of inflation, rising food and energy prices are pushing headline inflation
uncomfortably high in the first half of this year. I expect that these price increases will leave
some imprint on core inflation. Indeed, my business contacts, very much like President Fisher
said, continued to stress that they expect businesses to try to pass on past cost increases. They
mentioned specifically China and other sources of imported goods, along with energy prices, and
they will continue to try to pass these cost increases on to their customers—in particular, they
mentioned the second half of this year. This is a comment that we have been hearing pretty
consistently for the past few months. I will emphasize, as I think I did last time, that they used
the word “try” in terms of passing this on, given the economic climate, but it is something that
we definitely hear, especially from retailers in our District.
But I also expect these effects on underlying inflation, in terms of the inflation rate, will
be transitory, consistent with the academic literature, and President Evans’s recent analysis; here
I was referring to your analysis from the last meeting, but your new analysis would be consistent
with that, too. I’ll highlight two reasons for this expectation of muted second-round effects from
the bump-up in headline inflation under wages or underlying inflation. First, importantly, the
U.S. labor market today is characterized by relatively little real-wage rigidity. And here I am
April 26–27, 2011
129 of 244
thinking about COLAs, or automatic cost-of-living adjustments, or other impediments in the
labor market. Now, this contrasts starkly with many European economies where institutional
features of labor markets likely contribute to real-wage rigidity and the second-round effects of
inflation on wages that were in evidence there. I think the United States is very different from
Europe in this regard, and that’s important in terms of thinking about inflation.
Second, inflation expectations, I would say, remain remarkably stable in the United
States, despite the sizable swings in commodity import prices. Admittedly, households’ shortterm inflation expectations surged in the past few months, and this does raise the worry that
workers could try to bargain for higher wages, and that could potentially ignite a wage–price
spiral. I don’t see that as a major risk. Research at the San Francisco Fed has consistently found
that household inflation expectations tend to be overly sensitive to recent data. In particular, as
reported in the Tealbook, household inflation expectations are highly responsive to food and
energy price inflation. Futures prices suggest that the prices of most commodities won’t keep
rising at double-digit rates and will probably stabilize. And based on past patterns, as food and
energy prices stabilize, household inflation expectations should also come down to more normal
levels.
In sum, I expect the recovery to remain on course and for underlying inflation to remain
low. But there are numerous risks to this outlook, and I’ll be watching the data carefully,
looking for signs of a shift in the underlying trends, both in terms of output and inflation. Thank
you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Hoenig.
MR. HOENIG. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. First of all, our region of the country is doing
well-to-booming. If you look at the downside, our housing market is comparable to other areas
April 26–27, 2011
130 of 244
where there was a buildup of supply that exceeded the buildup in household formation; that
we’re working through. Once you get by that, our manufacturing sector came down slightly in
our most recent survey, but that was from a record high and we are seeing that continue to
expand. Our retail sales did slow down in the first part of the quarter, but did pick up pretty
significantly in March, which, from our point of view, is very positive. Agriculture is continuing
to do very well—a boom—and energy is also in a boom environment.
To add an anecdote on my concern for leverage, I think it is worth sharing this. We have
a pretty sizable energy company, recently formed in the past five years. It shifted its strategy
toward oil, away from natural gas. And they were able, because of the low cost to leverage, to
buy 1 million acres of development rights on land in our region for about $200 million—$200 an
acre of development rights. They then formed a royalty trust and took approximately 65,000 of
those acres from which they had borrowed the $200 million, went on an international tour and
raised money from sovereign wealth funds for rights to this royalty unit, and then closed their
deal here in the past few weeks for rights on 65,000 of the 1 million acres for $238 million. So
leverage is doing well in our part of the country: low cost of borrowing, easy money, lots of
liquidity sloshing around, here we go. So I bring that up as a caution to this Committee.
On the national level, I agree—information we have received since the last meeting
indicates that the economy recovery continues and that our labor markets are improving
modestly but steadily. Household spending and business investment in equipment and software
both continue to expand, while at the same time improving their balance sheets, which is good,
from my point of view. Since the last meeting, we have also seen that inflation expectations
have remained, as we say, contained, except that what we are seeing for energy, food, and now a
broader basket of goods indicates confidence may be waning in that particular sector. One thing
April 26–27, 2011
131 of 244
on unemployment—if you break it out, we are seeing pretty significant improvements in
employment for college graduates. We are seeing less in terms of high school and non–high
school; I’m not sure monetary policy can solve that, and I think we should be mindful of that.
One other thing that I worry about is that while we talk about our very accommodative
policy as necessary, we also see these energy and commodity costs rising and moving forward.
And, yes, they may transitory, but I’m afraid that when you have wages that are not rising, real
income is falling, and high prices in that environment actually kill demand because incomes
can’t keep up. And the effect on that middle income group that we are so concerned about
supporting is going to be negative, not positive. So we may not see the inflationary pressures
three and four years from now, but that may be because we have a new economic crisis built
around the fact that we put all of this liquidity into the system, built these commodities up, and
when the prices adjust and come down, it will be because we have starved the middle class in
terms of real-wage increases.
I think we need to be careful about how long we leave this very accommodative
monetary policy in place, because we are creating imbalances. They are going to correct. And
that, of course, will fall most heavily on those with middle and lower incomes. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Reports from our contacts indicate that the
Fifth District economy continues to grow. Our April survey released this morning indicates that
manufacturing is expanding, though not quite as broadly as before. Our respondents remain
quite optimistic about future conditions, though, and many have plans to hire in the first half of
the year. Several firms told us of difficulty finding adequate workers, because they preferred to
collect unemployment benefits or can’t pass drug tests. Service-sector activity is expanding
April 26–27, 2011
132 of 244
more broadly now, and our retail index swung strongly into positive territory this month with big
gains posted for sales revenue and shopper travel. Expectations for demand over the coming six
months improved noticeably as well.
Commercial real estate markets continued to show signs of improvement in some areas of
our District. While vacancy rates are mixed across the District, strong markets such as
Washington have been able to attract financing and investment. Several contacts have noted the
availability of construction financing for federal buildings, educational institutions, and medical
facilities. They called this the “feds, eds, and meds sectors.” And the data center market is said
to be exploding.
Commentary on inflation pressures was once again widespread, as many of you have
remarked as well. Price growth picked up in both our manufacturing and services surveys this
time, and is at or approaching the all-time highs for those series that they reached in 2008.
Manufacturers report passing on cost increases to industrial users but indicate difficulty passing
them on to retailers.
It’s worth noting that the current wage index has picked up in both manufacturing and
nonretail service sectors, and the manufacturing wage index number is the second highest on
record. At the national level, in response to softer data, the Tealbook has lowered its near-term
forecast for GDP, and I think that makes sense. It seems reasonable to pull down projections for
consumer spending in light of the energy price increases and other gloomy news, although I
haven’t pulled down my forecast quite as much as the Tealbook’s. In addition, the Tealbook has
written down a lower trajectory for residential investment this time, which I also wholeheartedly
endorse. The first-quarter numbers for housing managed to underperform my already minimal
expectations, and I continue to expect housing activity to remain at exceptionally low levels for
April 26–27, 2011
133 of 244
an extended period. In fact, my housing forecast looks more like the Tealbook’s fed funds
forecast—[laughter]—for that matter, my fed funds forecast looks more like their housing
forecast.
On the other hand, the outlook for exports and business investment in equipment and
software looks pretty good at this point. I’d part company with the staff with respect to secondhalf core inflation; they have it, I think, settling down, and I have trouble dismissing the many
anecdotes we’ve heard from firms that are having their margins squeezed and are expecting to
raise prices later this year. We’ve gotten those reports for several months now, and they come
from various-sized firms and various industries and various locations around the District, and
they are reminiscent of what we were hearing in 2004 when core and overall prices did
accelerate appreciably. My best guess is that we’ll see a relatively permanent step-up in core
inflation to near 2 percent. I don’t view this as inconsistent with our reads on the expectations of
the public regarding inflation beyond the near term, and those appear to be reasonably well
anchored at this point. And I think that is going to temper the extent to which a significant part
of firms’ cost increases are incorporated into final prices, and that should keep core from rising
much above 2.
But I don’t think we can take those favorable expectations for granted. I think we need to
be sure to validate those expectations. They rest on some presumptions about our actions and
statements, our reaction function. So we are going to have to make sure our actions and
statements in the coming year do validate those expectations. In my view, this is going to
require that we return policy to a neutral stance more promptly than the Tealbook assumes.
Two final comments. One, President Kocherlakota very aptly noted that the policy rules
to which we make frequent reference leave out changes in inflation expectations, because when
April 26–27, 2011
134 of 244
we apply them in the models we leave out any doubt in model agents’ minds about the likelihood
that we are going to stick to that policy rule. There is empirical work done by a former colleague
of mine, Marvin Goodfriend, an essay from about a decade and a half ago called “Monetary
Policy Comes of Age” in which, for the period after Volcker and Greenspan, he documented
instances in which longer-term bond rates rose by a substantial amount in a very short amount of
time, more than could be attributed to a change in expected real rates, and from which the
Committee inferred were changes in inflation expectations. And the Fed reacted strongly to
counteract that and to tighten policy by more than we otherwise would have. I think that’s the
place to look for guidance as to what magnitude of response one ought to presume in a reaction
function like that.
Finally, in response to President Evans’s remarks, I would like to disavow any unhealthy
preoccupation with endogeneity or exogeneity [laughter] and ask you to consider an experiment:
Start a DSGE model projection with initial conditions in which slack variables are less than they
really are—say, in your last period, say the fourth quarter—because of a configuration of shocks
that lead them to be less than they otherwise would be, and in which marginal costs are
commensurately lower. My conjecture is that you would get a higher inflation forecast, and I
think that experiment could motivate commentary to the effect that slack will keep inflation low.
As you can see, there is nothing essential about endogeneity or exogeneity there. I don’t think
that thought experiment is inconsistent with anything you said, so the attribution to exogenous
shocks versus slack—I just don’t see the distinction there.
Now, I haven’t seen your group’s research, and it’s been a little while since I reread
Christiano, Eichenbaum, and Evans, at least a few weeks—[laughter]. But more to the point, my
guess is that agents in that model and in your paper—back to my other comment—have
April 26–27, 2011
135 of 244
100 percent confidence in a reaction function. I don’t believe real-world agents are quite that
confident. For evidence, you could look at the five-year, five-year forward last year when in the
summer we had this fall in inflation expectations, and it seemed inconsistent with us being
believed with 100 percent probability to be following a constant rule.
I will say, though, to President Evans’s credit, he has given me a brilliant idea. I think I
am going to ask my staff to do research extending my JPE article.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. It’ll take five years to get published, though. [Laughter]
President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
MR. EVANS. Mr. Chairman, can I say something?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Do you want a rebuttal?
MR. EVANS. No—the reason I mentioned slack is that there’s not an output gap in that
model. I mean, slack is when you put it into the Woodford-type of style, and you talk about the
different type of market equilibrium. We can construct a slack variable; that’s a concept that we
did for the inflation dynamics. But per se, marginal cost is really the relevant thing. So you have
to work pretty hard to come up with a concept that looks like a Woodford slack variable. But the
object that you would work on to get at what you are talking about—which is a valid experiment,
I’m not denying that—would be to pump different shocks in there.
MR. LACKER. What you say is exactly true. The inflation dynamics run off marginal
cost. There is this link that one can draw in many models, a one-to-one relationship between the
level of marginal cost and the level of the variable that seems to accord with the notions of slack.
MR. EVANS. I was trying to skip that additional assumption, which often is at the heart
of what people are objecting to, which is, it’s not observable. But we can talk about this more. I
April 26–27, 2011
136 of 244
understand that we’re going to have some discussions about DSGE models at upcoming
meetings as well.
MR. LACKER. Okay, great.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. The Eighth District economy continues to
expand at a moderate pace. Businesses associated with agriculture, in particular, seem to be
doing quite well. This may be affected by recent wet weather in the District, but we’ll have to
see on that. Land sales, as I have reported before, seem to suggest pretty rich valuations.
Commodity price increases are a key concern, as they are all around the table here. Gas prices
are nearing levels which might importantly influence household behavior but don’t seem to have
done so quite yet. I agree with Presidents Fisher and Lacker that many CEOs view higher
commodity prices as forcing price increases for other goods, and in particular, for their own
goods. That seems to be a very prevalent view and much on the minds of business leaders.
Reports on housing and commercial real estate in the District were mixed. Foreclosure
rates in the District remain lower than for the nation as a whole by a substantial margin.
Anecdotal reports in the District seem to indicate moderate improvement in labor markets—more
ideas about hiring from more firms. Banks continue to report relatively weak loan demand, and I
think we should all keep in mind, there’s an awful lot of banks out there that are in pretty weak
condition still, and we’ve got a long way to go on that dimension.
Transportation businesses in the Eighth District seem to indicate moderate to strong
growth ahead. They are worried about energy prices possibly increasing further from here, but
they seem to be okay for now. Most of these firms make surcharges to cover energy price
changes. They do worry about that cutting into demand eventually, but for now, things seem
April 26–27, 2011
137 of 244
pretty robust. There is some shifting that is occurring in the industry to lower-cost, slower
transportation and away from the higher-priced products and the faster products. Technology
businesses also report robust activity—in fact, incredibly robust activity. There is something of a
boom in certain technology labor markets. Competition for talent is fierce. The comment I got
from a major technology firm was, “It’s like 1998 when it comes to hunting for talent in this
area.”
Nationally, it appears that the first quarter will be weaker than was once expected, and
weaker than I expected late last year and early this year. But I agree with the Tealbook
assessment that the second quarter and the second half of this year is likely to be stronger than
the first quarter. Part of that is based on somewhat stronger labor market performance over the
last six months than expected. I also agree with President Lockhart that anecdotal evidence that I
have heard seems to be at odds with the pretty soft Q1 numbers. To me, that suggests that there
are special factors driving the first-quarter number. We will see what it is; we haven’t actually
seen the first-quarter number yet.
We obviously face substantial risks in the economy, and the ones I am going to list here
are the same ones cited by President Williams. I do worry about all of them. First and foremost
is oil prices and continuing turmoil in the Middle East and North Africa. My main comment on
that is that it does not appear to be a so-called Hamilton shock so far. Jim Hamilton is a leading
researcher on this topic. For him, the price would have to go quite a bit above the moving
average of the price over the past three years, so that would be actually a very large number on
West Texas Intermediate. I’m not sure quite what to think about that, but I do think that
households are maybe a bit better equipped to handle high energy prices than they were in 2008
when it really was a shock. One of the things that happened in 2008 was that we went through
April 26–27, 2011
138 of 244
$100 a barrel oil for the first time in March 2008, and then it went up almost 50 percent from
there in the next three months. People started to wonder, is the world coming unhinged? And I
think that really changed household behavior. I’m not quite sure what we’ll get this time around,
but obviously it bears very close watching.
On Japan, I just don’t see the situation getting worse from here. I see it slowly getting
better. There are anecdotal reports in the Eighth District about plant shutdown or slowdown, so
that is affecting manufacturing, as we heard in the staff reports. That is important, but I see those
as temporary factors. It may be a little bit more persistent than I would have thought over the
past couple of weeks.
On Europe, I was in Europe. I do see renewed tension there. I do see some potential for
continuing problems. I got two views in Europe. The private-sector view seems to see bad math
for Portugal, Greece, and Ireland. They see trouble ahead. I saw a public-sector view that sees
delay as a strategy. I didn’t think this is a good mix. The private sector seems to smell blood in
the water, and I’m a little worried that this is going to get away from the Europeans. They have
been very good about addressing problems. Hopefully, they’ll come through again this time, but
I am a little worried about that situation. The problems there are not really resolved. It continues
to be a risk from our perspective.
The U.S. fiscal situation—your guess is as good as mine. Outcomes remain unclear. It is
still a wild card, in my view. Despite these risks, though, the best bet is, all of these will be
resolved in a reasonable way and that the outlook for the U.S. economy is still reasonably good
for 2011.
I’m going to turn now to remarks on core versus headline inflation, because this is a key
topic for us, and I have several remarks. First of all, in my view, control of headline inflation
April 26–27, 2011
139 of 244
over the medium term is the policy goal. These are the prices that people actually pay, and so
this is the index that we have to work with. Core is not the policy goal, though I think it
sometimes seems to be, because we refer to core so often and use it so much in our analysis. It’s
true that headline inflation is generally more volatile, but so what? That is the policy problem
that we face, and that’s our job. It is not really our job to make our policy problem simpler than
it really is. There are stories that take the view that if we adjusted policy in reaction to the
volatile consumer price index, or PCE inflation index, we would get an unstable feedback loop
and cause havoc in the economy. Stories about unstable feedback are unproven, in my view.
There’s very little research on this. And, anyway, you’d have to adjust your policy rule so that
you adjust in an appropriate way given the volatility of the inflation rate that you are looking at.
One reason to look at core, obviously, is as an indicator of future headline inflation. I am
not convinced by this argument, and I have five remarks on it. The statement that core predicts
future headline is usually associated with univariate forecast models. That is, inflation as a
function of past inflation alone, appropriately measured, without other variables. This is not how
we normally forecast inflation as a Committee; we include other variables such as inflation
expectations and slack variables, as was just being discussed. One example would be Stock and
Watson at the Jackson Hole conference last year, but there are many other examples.
A second remark is, in my view, core has little theory behind it. It comes to us from the
1970s where we just threw out certain prices because they were inconvenient to look at. It has a
long and venerable tradition around the table, but it doesn’t have much to commend it from any
statistical perspective or any theoretical perspective.
One might think that what we’re doing is throwing out the components of inflation that
have the highest signal-to-noise ratio for the various components. If you look at simple measures
April 26–27, 2011
140 of 244
of the signal-to-noise ratio, energy indeed has the lowest signal-to-noise ratio, so it would make
sense, if you want to pick one off, to throw out energy. Food is actually not the second-lowest
signal-to-noise ratio in the inflation index, and in fact food actually has a relatively high signalto-noise ratio. So the food part doesn’t make very much sense. Results like this, and all the
things I am going to talk about, are also very dependent on the sample considered; that is always
a problem when we are looking at issues like this.
You may not care about theory as much as I do, so let’s just think about empirics alone.
But the empirics are also weak. In the paper by Julie Smith, which is sometimes cited on this
topic—forecasting future headline inflation with some measure of core inflation, including a
traditional core inflation measure—the traditional core inflation measure actually has the highest
root mean square error in predicting future headline inflation. So other types of core measures
do better in that particular paper. Results, again, are sensitive to the sample period for all
measures. And as is typical of empirical work in this area, it’s going to be very sensitive to what
time period you are going to look at. It is hard to get really clean results that warrant the kind of
emphasis that we put on it around the table here.
Now, a very legitimate issue for the Committee is: What subset of prices, if any, could
be the central bank target? If you don’t want to target the overall measure of inflation, there may
be reasonable ways to think about some subset of prices that are the prices that you want to
emphasize and that you want to target and talk about. There is a literature on this question, and
that literature does have the potential to rationalize a focus on a subset of prices instead of the
overall price index. But so far, this literature seems to have very little influence at the FOMC,
and this may be because the typical recommendations that come out of the literature are almost
nothing like what we typically talk about here at the table.
April 26–27, 2011
141 of 244
One result from the literature is that you should focus on the sticky-price sector; that
comes from Woodford and his coauthors. You would arrange the prices by the ones that are the
most sticky, you would create an index of that, and then you would target that. That would be an
argument for looking at some subset of prices instead of the overall prices. We don’t do
anything like that as far as I know. Another result, if you look at it in an international context
with sticky prices, comes from Clarida, Galí and Gertler who have a multicountry model. In that
model you would focus on the domestic sticky prices and forget about the import prices. We
don’t seem to do anything like that.
Even though these are not popular conclusions—and maybe they shouldn’t be, maybe
they are not established enough in the literature—it may be fruitful to think more carefully about
why we might wish to focus on a subset of prices, or, otherwise, just abandon that, and say we
are going to focus on the overall price index. Then we could better rationalize what we do than
what we do now.
Now, if you don’t care anything about that, then let’s just talk about practical concerns on
core versus headline. Obviously, it is a problem for us to refer to core measures because people
say that they have to pay the other prices. That always happens when commodity prices are
rising in the U.S. economy. So I think we should certainly deemphasize core inflation as an
ultimate goal, and, indeed, some of our rhetoric has moved away from talking so much about
core inflation to talk about headline inflation as the medium-term policy goal. I would go so far
as to possibly take core PCE inflation out of the FOMC projections. I think it gives it too high of
a status. And, as I’m arguing here, it doesn’t have enough credibility to warrant that status.
Temporary headline inflation movements can just simply be called “temporary.” We can
just say, yes, inflation is high right now, but we don’t think it’s going to continue to be high, and
April 26–27, 2011
142 of 244
that’s the way it is. We don’t have to refer to core to make that argument. And we can do other
things to smooth out data measurements. We can look at inflation movements from one year
ago, for instance, as a way to smooth out movements in inflation as opposed to excluding certain
categories of prices.
One final practical consideration on commodity prices. We often say that the increases in
commodity prices are due to global demand, evidently outstripping global supply. I have made
this argument many times myself, and presumably China and India are key drivers in this
argument—that is, they are key drivers of the global demand in commodities markets. But then
we turn around and we say that we think the situation is temporary, but the situation with China
and India is not a temporary situation. This is going to go on for decades. I think that citing the
global factors that you know are going to continue for decades gets us in a bit of a trap when we
turn around later and say, “I think these are going to be temporary factors.” Even though I’ve
done it myself, I’m not sure that that is always the best argument.
The bottom line is that I think core versus headline inflation is a long-standing issue for
the FOMC. It’s certainly a hot topic right now, and I’m sure it will continue to be in the future.
Maybe now is the time to deemphasize core inflation. If you want a less volatile measure, use
one that is perhaps more defensible, something that we can point to and say that we’ve got a
better rationale for it, other than that it has been used for decades here. I think that might be
helpful to the Committee going forward. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Bullard, you raise valid points about
the relationship between core and future headline, but I think the idea that we target core
inflation is kind of old. I think everybody around the table does target forecasted headline
inflation, and I just want to mention that tomorrow in my press conference I will be highlighting
April 26–27, 2011
143 of 244
the projections, and I’ll be focusing entirely on headline inflation, but on the forecast of headline
inflation in the medium term. Your comment about taking core out of the projections is an
interesting one, though. I’ll have to keep that in mind. Thank you. Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. On the activity today, I think
I share the views of many people around the table that, while activity looks better than last
summer—faster job growth supported by a healthier financial system, and a trade sector that
looks more likely to make a persistent contribution to growth, which I think is very valuable—
it’s disappointing relative to where we were at the last FOMC meeting, with real GDP growth in
the first quarter quite slow and the rebound in the second quarter quite modest.
I think what is striking to me is that this is occurring at a time that fiscal and monetary
policy is on very stimulative settings. The state of monetary policy ease will start to moderate if
we complete our large-scale asset purchases, and fiscal policy is going to turn significantly
restrictive in 2012, even in the absence of additional fiscal measures by the Congress. We
calculate that we are on track for fiscal restraint in 2012 of about 1 percent of GDP, which is
pretty sizable if the economy is going into that growing at a 3 percent-plus type of rate.
In terms of the first-quarter GDP print, I agree with David Wilcox’s comments, it does
seem to overstate the weakness. The ISM surveys, the industrial production data, the consumer
spending, and the labor market developments all seem more positive than that. So either we will
have upward revisions to the data over time or the production will go into inventories. We’ll just
have to wait and see how that plays out.
I do think, though, that there are some significant risks to economic growth posed by
higher energy prices. I note that the magnitude of the increase in the oil bill for households is
roughly comparable in size to the payroll tax cut. The problem is that the payroll tax cut is
April 26–27, 2011
144 of 244
temporary and reverses the beginning of next year, and it’s not clear how long the energy prices
are going to stay elevated.
On inflation, I think that there is no great surprise that the higher oil prices are feeding
into headline, and, of course, there’s a little bit of spillover into core. Where I’m maybe a little
bit more concerned than the staff is on inflation expectations. I think you can point to the data
and say, well, they’re still reasonably well anchored in the sense that the University of Michigan
consumer expectations five-year measure has come down in the April survey after going up a lot
in March, and you can point to different measures of five-year, five-year forward TIPS
breakevens showing different things, but I do think there’s quite a bit of risk here if you take a
look at the whole picture. We have very stimulative monetary policy with a large Federal
Reserve balance sheet. We have fiscal policy on an unsustainable path. We have significantly
higher gold prices, significantly higher silver prices. We have a dollar that’s actually weakened
quite a bit over the past few weeks. I think that while you could still argue that inflation
expectations are well anchored, if I worry about what is going to happen next, I think the risks
are very predominantly on the side that they could become less well anchored.
In terms of the systemic risks that we face, there are a number of things that are
concerning. Nathan touched on some of them. The European problem is not going away; there
are at least four problems there. First, Greece is lagging behind where they need to be. In other
words, they are not performing up to their commitments, so that means that they need more
resources. Second, the political constraints I discussed at the last meeting are becoming more
binding as core European countries are less willing to provide that additional aid that Greece in
fact needs. Angela Merkel has suffered some political setbacks, and the Finnish elections
showed that those who do not favor aid are gaining political ground. So as a consequence of
April 26–27, 2011
145 of 244
that, some of the German authorities have put restructuring on the table after keeping that very
much off the table for many months. This is not a timely development, because it obviously sets
in place very bad dynamics leading to much higher interest rates in the periphery, lower prices,
and that, of course, just reinforces the likelihood that the restructuring will have to take place. It
also raises the potential needs, because if the Greek debt were restructured, then the Greek banks
would be impaired by a greater margin. So you not only need more money for the Greek
government to continue its operations, but also for the Greek banks to be able to stay in business.
It is not at all clear where those resources would come from. And as Nathan pointed out, this all
increases the contagion risk to Ireland, Portugal, and even Spain. Spain up to now has been able
to sail away from the rest of the periphery, but there could be political setbacks in Spain, so I
don’t think that they are out of the woods by any stretch of the imagination. The final problem in
Europe is that there is really no viable exit strategy. The financing mechanism that is supposed
to succeed the EFSF would be a financing mechanism in which the debt issued from that facility
would be senior to the existing debt, so all of the incentives are for private investors to exit. All
this means is that all of the debt of the periphery is now getting concentrated in public hands—
either the ECB directly holding the debt, the ECB financing the debt, or the EFSF funding the
debt. So it’s not really clear how this is going to play out over the medium to longer run.
A second issue is Japan. The supply constraints have gotten most of the attention. What
struck me, though, when I was there a couple of weeks ago is that there is also a pretty sizable
demand shock in Japan. Tokyo is as quiet as it’s ever been, and a lot of the leadership in Japan is
talking to people about how you need to go out and go back to business as usual, go to parties, go
out drinking, do all these sorts of things. But nobody feels like doing that. And I completely
understand that. One, it is a terrible tragedy, and people are in mourning. But, two, you can’t
April 26–27, 2011
146 of 244
get away from what has happened, because every day there are aftershocks. We were in Tokyo
for 36 hours, and there were at least six earthquakes in that 36-hour period—one of them when I
was actually speaking. The chandelier started to swing, which is a little disconcerting, [laughter]
because every time one of these earthquakes starts, you don’t really know what the ultimate
magnitude of the earthquake is going to be. So I think it is very difficult for them to get back to
business as usual.
The Middle East–North Africa also remains an issue. I guess the news there is that not
much has spread beyond Libya to other oil producers. But the bad news is that it looks like a
complete standoff in Libya. Also, the bad news is that Saudi Arabia has basically said they were
going to pump additional crude, but the crude either isn’t forthcoming or it’s not demanded
because it’s not as high quality as the Libyan crude. The Saudi promises haven’t actually led to
additional supply, and there is not actually an oil response to that increased willingness of the
Saudis to pump oil. So it seems to me the risks there are very much on the side of oil prices
staying higher for longer, and crimping real income.
Then, finally, we have our own little set of risks that we talked a little bit about earlier—
the Treasury debt limit ceiling. I think that there’s a real risk here, in part because the two sides
are really far apart, and because they are both looking for political advantage going into the next
election cycle. There is really a risk that the brinkmanship turns into miscalculation. And the
risk there is greater because the markets aren’t taking it seriously, and people can say, “What’s
the big deal? Markets aren’t worried about it, so let’s go to the edge.” I wouldn’t make much of
the S&P putting the U.S. on negative watch. I think that is just catching up with reality. I think
what really matters is what the Congress does or doesn’t do over the next couple of months.
Thank you.
April 26–27, 2011
147 of 244
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Yellen.
MS. YELLEN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. My view of the modal outlook is little
changed since our March meeting. I agree with the contours of the Tealbook and in particular
with the judgment that the first-quarter soft patch probably reflects idiosyncratic factors with
relatively little bearing on the outlook. I anticipate economic growth at a moderate pace during
the second half of the year and expect it to strengthen over time.
An armada of headwinds is constraining the recovery: higher food and energy prices,
falling housing prices, ongoing weakness in residential and nonresidential construction, intense
pressures on state and local government spending, and, beginning next year, significant fiscal
drag from the federal budget. Nonetheless, I anticipate that the impetus from investment and
consumer spending, along with robust global growth, will prove powerful enough to overcome
these drags. Business confidence has improved markedly. Manufacturing activity is robust.
Our accommodative monetary policy has caused credit and broader financial conditions to ease,
supporting aggregate demand through many different channels. There are heartening signs of
improvement in the labor market, and recent data suggest that unemployment and vacancies are
now tracing the cyclical pattern that has been typical of past recoveries. I see this as encouraging
evidence that unemployment is mainly cyclical, not structural, and should, therefore, revert to
normal as the recovery proceeds. My bottom line is that the U.S. economy appears to be in a
self-sustaining recovery that is proceeding at a moderate pace. I expect the output gap and
unemployment to decline, but slowly, so both will be substantially higher than normal levels at
the end of the forecast horizon.
Turning to inflation, measures of underlying inflation remain well below the 2 percent
level I consider consistent with our dual mandate. For example, the market-based core PCE
April 26–27, 2011
148 of 244
price index has risen less than 1 percent over the past year, and at an annual rate of 1.2 percent
over the three months ending in February. These inflation outcomes partly reflect healthy
productivity growth and modest wage increases. Unit labor costs have barely increased since
2007. Moreover, inflation expectations remain generally well anchored. Higher commodity
prices have naturally caused headline inflation to surge in recent months. Core inflation has also
picked up somewhat as producers are passing through a portion of their higher input costs into
the prices of a broad range of goods and services. However, as long as commodity prices
generally level off, I expect that by around midyear, headline inflation will revert to rates close to
those of core inflation, which in turn should decline significantly over the second half of this
year. With exceptional slack in the labor market throughout the forecast horizon, I see little
chance of the second-round effects that would occur were employers to boost wages in an effort
to compensate workers for the real income losses they have sustained. And here I agree very
much with President Williams’s comment that there is virtually no evidence in the United States
of real-wage rigidity. Therefore, I expect inflation to remain subdued throughout the end of the
forecast horizon.
My modal forecast is benign, but the risks surrounding it keep me awake at night. As
policymakers, our job is to be prepared to respond to a wide array of potential threats, and some
could necessitate more-rapid policy tightening, whereas others would call for additional policy
accommodation. We therefore need to maintain open minds on the future stance of monetary
policy.
The most obvious risks relate to commodity prices. Higher food and energy prices are
sapping household purchasing power, and the effect is evident in consumer surveys and
anecdotal reports of retrenchment by the lower-income households most severely affected.
April 26–27, 2011
149 of 244
Anecdotal evidence also suggests that the uncertainty associated with recent commodity price
trends is causing some businesses to put expansion plans on hold. These existing downside risks
are compounded by the possibility that futures prices notwithstanding, commodity prices could
escalate a lot further, potentially derailing the incipient recovery. Were such a scenario to
materialize, we might well conclude that policy should be more accommodative than in the
Tealbook baseline. Of course, we must also be prepared for the possibility that a further surge in
commodity prices could push up inflation and inflationary expectations, triggering a wage–price
spiral to take hold. Such a development would necessitate a significant policy response. Our
experience during 2002 to 2008, when oil prices more than quadrupled, but measures of
underlying inflation remained close to 2 percent, gives me comfort that commodity price
movements need not trigger such an outcome, but we cannot take such a benign scenario for
granted.
I actually have quite a long list of risks that I worry about, but I’ll mention just one other.
A second risk that worries me relates to fiscal policy. Meaningful efforts to cut the federal
budget deficit could produce a significant and extended drag on economic growth in the years
ahead. The recognition in the Congress that a multiyear budget plan to stabilize the U.S.
debt-to-GDP ratio is essential to fiscal sustainability and longer run economic growth is
heartening. Failure to enact such a package would threaten our financial stability, while an
extended period of delay would be associated with elevated uncertainty that could start weighing
heavily on the spending decisions of households and businesses. However, the needed fiscal
adjustment is substantial, and a program on the necessary scale could be associated with
significant fiscal drag that would reduce the equilibrium real interest rate in coming years. In
April 26–27, 2011
150 of 244
this scenario, a highly accommodative stance of monetary policy could be appropriate for quite
some time.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Duke.
MS. DUKE. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Bankers and bank analysts are increasingly less
worried about credit quality and much more worried about the ability of banks to generate asset
and revenue growth. Credit metrics are within or rapidly approaching long-term acceptable
standards in commercial lending, auto lending, and now in credit cards. Classified assets are
declining at larger banks and leveling off at smaller banks, and a number of bankers point out
that a significant portion, up to one-third, of CRE assets classified as nonperforming have
continued to pay as agreed. Absorption of commercial space continues but at low rental rates.
Still, cash flows support debt services as long as interest rates remain low.
Even in residential mortgage portfolios, new entrants into delinquency are slowing.
Bankers suspect that this improvement could be seasonal as tax refunds could be helping
borrowers catch up, but they point out that, at least, if borrowers are using the cash from tax
refunds to make mortgage payments rather than something else, that would represent progress.
It’s also possible that this is finally a manifestation in mortgages of the credit cycle that we
already saw play out in auto and credit cards, as fewer borrowers are losing their jobs and newer
loans are of much higher quality. I also believe that the sharply lower delinquency rates across
products and across borrowers are indicative of less financial stress among those who still have
access to credit or credit outstanding, possibly a signal that we’re coming to the end of
deleveraging, especially among consumers. However, I would point out that this signal would
not apply to the long-term unemployed, those who have found jobs at much lower wages than
they had previously, or those with severely delinquent or underwater mortgages.
April 26–27, 2011
151 of 244
Demand for all types of credit remains weak. There’s some growth in C&I lending
primarily reported by larger banks lending to larger companies, but it is still event driven, such as
for loans to fund mergers and acquisitions. Those who reported lending for working capital or
capital investment cited loans to strong sectors such as manufacturing, energy, and agriculturerelated businesses. There also appears to be some slight pickup in small business lending and
evidence that small businesses perceive loans as slightly easier to get. Banks reported easing of
terms and rates in commercial lending in the SLOOS. Easing is usually prompted by
competition, and, indeed, in my conversations, a few bankers characterized competition for C&I
loans as aggressive. A number of banks reported some demand and some appetite for new CRE
loans, primarily for purchases of existing properties, refinances, and multifamily. Banks also
reported easing standards in consumer credit in the SLOOS. However, the bankers pointed out
that during the recession, credit performance for a given credit score band had deteriorated, so
the cutoff scores were raised. What they now report as easing is really a return to the previous
levels.
One of the key assumptions in the Tealbook forecast is that the economic recovery will
be supported by increasing credit availability. Overall, my impression is that credit conditions
are considerably easier than they were at the height of the crisis, but that, with the exception of
residential real estate lending, they’re probably pretty close to as good as they’re going to get.
Even as loan demand remains weak, deposits continue to show strong growth. Bankers
are having a tough time finding ways to employ these additional deposits. Most have already
replaced much of their wholesale funding with deposits. Some are actively using lower interest
rates to discourage new deposits and refusing to bid on large deposits, and rates are reportedly
April 26–27, 2011
152 of 244
being quoted in the single digits for large deposits, consistent with the rates we’re seeing in other
short-term markets.
Finally, lest we get too complacent about reserve levels, as a final indicator of bank
balance sheet preferences, we could look at banks’ willingness to hold reserves. About twothirds of the reserves created since we started the LSAPs in November have been absorbed by
foreign banks, and a few large U.S. banks have substantially reduced their individual holdings of
reserves even as the aggregates have increased. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Since our March meeting a lot has
happened, but I don’t think the basic lay of the land has changed significantly. Two features
continue to frame the picture. First, the economy certainly has some self-sustaining momentum,
but still not at a particularly robust pace. The well-documented obstacles to a sharp recovery
from recession that has been induced by a financial crisis have proved just as enduring as Ken
Rogoff and Carmen Reinhart predicted. At some point, obviously, obstacles such as the
overhang of foreclosed homes will recede into the background, but this hasn’t happened yet.
Second, there continue to be an unusual number of essentially political or geopolitical risks,
many of which were rehearsed by Bill a few minutes ago, that could slow even further the
modest speed of the recovery.
Last week I found myself lowering my economic growth projection under the cumulative
weight of these risks. Strictly speaking, I guess I probably shouldn’t do that, because I think
we’re supposed to give a modal projection rather than a number discounted based on the
combined likelihood and severity of significant risks. But the very number and persistence of
these risks, particularly the potential for more political turmoil in key oil-producing regions,
April 26–27, 2011
153 of 244
makes them hard to exclude from even a baseline projection. And as I think John mentioned
earlier, some appear already to have negatively influenced consumer confidence.
This may seem like a relatively pessimistic read of the economic landscape, and I have
three responses to that. One, relative pessimism has served me pretty well in the last couple of
years. [Laughter] Two, I note that the central tendency of the FOMC has come down to where I
was in January, and I’ve just gone down a little bit further. And, three, I do weight the risks to
economic growth to the upside in my projection, and I suspect a number of you actually weight
to the downside.
Rather than going into more detail on the projection, I want to spend the rest of my time
on how we’re going to go about thinking about inflation over, I suspect, the course of the next
several meetings. A lot of people have already addressed it today. Over the weekend, one of the
many things I did instead of hunting for Easter eggs was to go through the transcripts of the
FOMC from the middle part of 2005 and from all of 2008, periods during which there had been
big run-ups in oil prices and, to some degree, other commodity prices, to see how the FOMC was
assessing what was going on and to see whether we can learn anything from that experience.
I’ll return to that in a moment, but I first want to say that I think what a number of you
have tried to do today is to both develop a model or a theory or at least a mechanism for how
commodity prices or other current headline inflationary forces would carry forward into future
inflation. And then I think some of you have tried to specify what some of the tangible datadriven indicators of those trends would be, and that seems to me not only the right but the
essential way to think about this going forward. We both have to have a concept of how we
think current pressures would persist over time, and, because we can’t for good reason afford to
April 26–27, 2011
154 of 244
wait until that actually happens, we have to try to identify what kinds of data would give us some
fairly strong basis for believing it will happen.
But I contrast that with just stating things that might happen, and this is what one learns
by going back and looking at the transcripts. Concerns about commodity prices, particularly
reports of what businesses are saying—and there was a lot of this in 2005 and 2008—read like
this: “Man, we have just shifted. We are now thinking in inflationary terms.” And of course,
about six months later they weren’t. So I think that’s the kind of information that we have to
discount because it hasn’t proved particularly probative in the past. Anecdotes can help us
question what sorts of data streams would be useful, but ultimately, we need to be a somewhat
data-sensitive group when we start to make our decisions.
So let me try to add one piece of information here, but this is hardly dispositive. I’m
looking again at labor markets, which won’t surprise you, and I begin with a somewhat puzzling
phenomenon of the unemployment rate having dropped so much in the last six months despite a
rate of net job creation that was, until recently, quite tepid, and even today is not particularly
robust. Without any more information than that, I think one would assume that the reason for
this phenomenon is a drop in the labor participation rate reflects the combined effects of
extended UI benefits expiring, the long-term unemployed becoming discouraged and leaving the
labor force, and the impact of a couple of years of a declining trend in participation because of an
aging population, which is just now showing up on the other side of the recession after having
been masked by the big dislocations of the past couple of years. And I think there’s something
to all these explanations. The Board staff has been trying to dig deeper in order to quantify each
of these effects, and I suspect their analyses will be of considerable importance not just for
present purposes, but for monetary policy going forward.
April 26–27, 2011
155 of 244
But there are indications, admittedly preliminary, suggesting that something else is going
on here, and I’ll mention two. First, if trend participation is to be an important part of the
explanation, one would expect it to show up principally through demographics—that is,
participation rates begin to decline pretty dramatically for each five-year band of people
beginning at age 55. Even if, as seems the case, the participation rates of older Americans are
increasing now based both on choice and economic necessity, there’s such a gap between the rate
for 50-year-olds and rate for 65-year-olds that this shift would be swamped by the fundamental
fact of the baby boomers getting old.
This logic of changing trend participation will probably be reflected in the data over the
medium term, but it has not been reflected in the data for the last year. The BLS doesn’t publish
age-specific data on employment and unemployment as quickly and as thoroughly as one would
like, so we’ve got to be a little cautious in drawing conclusions here. But reading the seasonally
adjusted household numbers over the last year or so, one sees something at odds with the trend
explanation. In each of the prime working decades of 25- to 34-year-olds, 35- to 44-year-olds,
and 45- to 54-year-olds, the numbers of unemployed have been falling, but in each cohort, the
number of employed workers has risen by less than the amount by which the unemployed have
fallen. Indeed, if we look at 35- to 44-year-olds, whose participation rate is historically the
highest among any age group, we see that the number of both employed and unemployed has
fallen. So there are fewer people in that age cohort employed today than one quarter ago, two
quarters ago, and three quarters ago. Significant numbers of this group have obviously left the
labor market. Now, on the other hand, contrary to what one might have expected, the number of
employed 20- to 24-year-olds has increased during this same period, which is something you
April 26–27, 2011
156 of 244
wouldn’t predict demographically. The number of employed people over age 55 has also
increased, more in line with what labor participation trends might have predicted.
But going back to that central point about the three prime-age working cohorts, if the
trend explanation is, for the moment at least, not so convincing, we have to look to some of the
other standard explanations, such as exhaustion of UI benefits, to see if those are stronger. That
is, prime-age workers may be dropping out in large numbers after having exhausted their UI
benefits. Perhaps that’s true. I’m sure it is to some degree, but some yet unpublished research
by Alan Krueger suggests that something else is also going on here. Based on what I believe
was his examination of raw rather than published BLS data, he finds that in the past couple of
years, the recently unemployed have been more likely to leave the labor force than the long-term
unemployed. Now, this, obviously, is a reversal of traditional trends.
Alan offers several hypotheses as to why, although he cannot demonstrate any of them
right now with currently available data. What’s important for my purposes is that most of these
hypotheses, particularly when combined with recent age-specific labor participation rates,
suggest that there may be even more slack in the labor markets than the unemployment numbers
would suggest, even when they are read through the lens of labor market participation trends.
One of the most significant of his hypotheses is that middle-class people with a working partner
have shifted pretty quickly to getting more education or training to improve their skills.
Presumably such people will be back in the labor market at some time in the future.
All of this raises more questions than it answers, but when seen in combination with the
still very low level of quits and other factors, including the relative stagnation of unit labor costs,
I think it pushes toward there being a greater output gap and a lower medium-term NAIRU than
the usual employment statistics would suggest. While I continue to think that the unemployment
April 26–27, 2011
157 of 244
rate may tick up again later this year as people are lured back into the labor market by some
increases in job creation, Krueger’s research implies that this may not be the case. But even if
the unemployment rate continues to decline, his analysis suggests that there will still be more
real slack in labor markets.
So let me conclude not with strong assertions about labor markets, but instead, again, to
suggest that for all of us over the course of the next few meetings, it’s going to be critical to try
to identify specific kinds of data and specific kinds of activity in parts of the labor market that, in
a concrete fashion, would reflect some impact of changing inflation expectations or tighter labor
markets. And I think that’s the only way, probably, we’re going to be able to develop a
consensus on what’s going on, as opposed to reverting somewhat less helpfully to our priors as
to what the models look like untethered from data. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Fisher.
MR. FISHER. I want to just address one issue the Governor raised— and I admire the
way you spent Easter weekend. I think if you look at the transcripts thoroughly, what you’ll see
is that what we were hearing from business reporters, to which I am a devotee, was a significant
buildup in price pressures leading up to August 2008, and they were right. They did not
anticipate the collapse in demand that occurred as a result of the financial crisis, and that’s when
you began to see a reversal in expectations. I think we have to be very careful to dismiss
microeconomic decisionmakers. They should supplement and complement the data. Data are
history. What we’re trying to get a sense of is things at the margin. I always preface my
comments by saying “for what it is worth,” and for what it is worth, I think it is valuable to listen
to those who actually allocate resources, decide who to hire, and price products.
April 26–27, 2011
158 of 244
MR. TARULLO. I anticipated that [laughter], which is why I went back to 2005,
because we didn’t have a financial crisis following 2005, and there were many of the same kinds
of expectations. And I guess, Richard, what I’d say is that the 2008 transcripts are probably
more a lesson in the need to look at what else is going on. I have to say, I was taken by the
relative downplaying of financial risks and the relative playing up of inflationary risks in the
middle part of 2008.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I think these observations about
the labor market are spot on. I will say, I’ve spent some time looking at these data too, and I
think it’s very confusing. One thing I would point to—and I think I mentioned this last time—is
looking at these broader measures of unemployment and thinking about the marginally attached,
et cetera, I would have thought that if we were seeing a group of people leaving the labor force
who were about to pop back in, you would have seen more of an increase in the group of
marginally attached workers than we’ve seen.
MR. TARULLO. I would think that there should be something to that as well, Narayana.
And it is frustrating to use the published BLS data because they simply aren’t as granular as
would be useful to us. But that’s why one of Alan’s hypotheses is particularly interesting, which
is that people are going into training or, in some cases, going into child care for their own kids
for some specified period of time.
MS. YELLEN. I just wanted to ask the staff—isn’t it the case that the broader measures
of unemployment have declined less than the official measure?
April 26–27, 2011
159 of 244
MR. WASCHER. Right. From that standpoint, people who want a job but have dropped
out of the labor force and still indicate that they want a job might have accounted for
0.2 percentage point of the decline in the unemployment rate over the past year.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Certainly I accept that amount would be about right, yes.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Governor Raskin.
MS. RASKIN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. The moderate pace of the recovery is
continuing. The economy continues to face a number of headwinds limiting its ability to grow
faster. These headwinds include higher gasoline prices, reduced government spending at both
the state and national levels, and a housing market characterized by low equity values, supply
overhang, and deteriorating quality.
Historically, my projections have been more pessimistic than the staff’s because of my
continued concern regarding the housing market, low state and local spending, and the slow
resumption of consumer demand. Wanting to offset this pessimism with the seemingly good
news that the unemployment rate was looking lower—and not daring to wade into the debate
over modern finance models between President Evans and President Lacker, nor having really
the extensive list of interlocutors known to President Fisher, and, finally, seeing no short-term
end to the fact that I will always be last in the economic go-round [laughter]—I had no choice
but to hit the road last week in search of some observable data and traveled to an unemployment
center.
The one I visited is known for its cutting-edge approach in providing training, job
prospects, credit counseling, foreclosure counseling, and other enhancements to people moving
in between jobs. I claim no academic precision to the sampling here, nor do I claim anything
about the temporal dimension to these observations. I went to the unemployment center with no
April 26–27, 2011
160 of 244
preconceived notion except data from the latest household survey showing that the number of
people involuntarily working part time had increased by 90,000 in March to 8.4 million. The
household survey also indicated that the nation’s 13½ million unemployed people have been out
of work, on average, for at least 39 weeks. With all of this labor available, one question I had is
whether the recent increased inflation could lead to a wage–price spiral of the kind that typically
ignites the runaway levels experienced in 1979 when inflation was 13.32 percent. Another
question I had is whether improvement in the unemployment rate alone should cause us to claim
“mission accomplished.”
What I observed at the unemployment center—actually, it was more positively called an
employment center—is a pipeline that carries the newly unemployed between jobs. The
existence of jobs at the end of the pipeline is what motivates people to even enter the pipeline
and participate in services provided throughout the process, such as resume writing, computer
literacy, one-on-one counseling, and foreclosure prevention. The quality of the jobs at the end of
the pipeline was not particularly exciting. The day before I was there, the city’s stadium had
been rented by Monster.com to accommodate job seekers and employers. The job seekers
showed up in droves, but the bulk of vacant jobs represented by the few employers that
participated looked mostly like multilevel marketing jobs that paid commission only and were
based on the number of friends you signed up.
Not all job seekers were uneducated. Most recent additions of job seekers to this
particular employment center were college and graduate-school educated. On the day of my
visit, they were pharmaceutical company employees, and they were clogging the pipeline, in the
view of the less educated, because the more educated were settling for jobs that were lower
paying and of a kind that the less educated were vying for. Once the less educated saw that they
April 26–27, 2011
161 of 244
were losing out, they left the pipeline, thereby abandoning the retraining programs that could
have been of some benefit and increasing the time these people remain jobless and with
insufficient income.
Another group of employees clogging exit from the pipeline were the so-called surviving
employees. These employees have jobs but are so demoralized and exhausted by being the sole
survivors holding onto their jobs and picking up the slack of the laid-off employees that they,
too, are looking for jobs. Once they add to the competition for a vacant job, they bump away the
unemployed in the pipeline who believe themselves to be increasingly stigmatized by the length
of time they’ve been without work. So the existence and attractiveness of jobs at the end of the
pipeline determined whether people even entered the pipeline to begin with.
For the recently unemployed, the challenge of this employment center was to tighten the
link between the employer doing the layoff and the about-to-be-laid-off employee so as to get the
employee into the employment center before being laid off. This way the employee would stay
engaged in a job search. Of course, despite enhancements like resume writing, one-on-one
counseling, and computer literacy training, the only real enhancement seems to be a high
probability of their being a job.
I’ll stop there but sum it up by saying that this picture, were it to be duplicated somewhat
consistently across the country, is not a picture of robust job creation, nor one that seems
susceptible to setting off a dangerous wage–price spiral, nor one that shows bargaining and
negotiation over wages to be anything but concessionary. It’s a long way of saying that labor
markets will be strong when the economy can absorb the people who want to reenter the job
market. Thank you.
April 26–27, 2011
162 of 244
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you, and we compliment you on your original
research.
I would do a better job of summarizing this conversation if I had overnight to do it. If
your patience will last just a minute more, I’ll give my own views on the outlook, and tomorrow
we’ll start with a summary, and then we’ll turn to the policy go-round.
I have not a great deal original to say about the real side. I agree that the weakness of the
first quarter is mostly due to temporary factors, much of which should come back. And like the
rest of you, I think a moderate recovery is going to continue as those factors reverse and as the
labor market continues to improve and generate income. We’ve seen some stabilization in the
saving rate, which suggests that as labor income grows along about a 3 percent path,
consumption should also grow. Note has been taken of the industrial sector, which is doing quite
well and is relying to some extent on very strong export demand from emerging markets. As
I’ve said many times before, notwithstanding the positive direction, we are still in a very deep
hole. For example, total hours of work, which is a good summary of labor input given all the
different margins on which labor can be varied, is still about 6 percent below pre-recession
levels, not even taking into account any trend increases in labor supply. Paradoxically though, I
think that actually increases to some extent the projection of near-term economic growth because
there is a little bit of a bounceback effect that you would expect to see after a deep recession.
That said, I marked down my outlook for the rest of this year and next year by a few
tenths. We’ve talked a lot about oil and commodity prices. Of course, they’re a drag on growth
as well as a source of inflation. I think there’s also a lot of uncertainty and lack of confidence, at
least on the household side now. There were some striking polls to the effect that
notwithstanding the improvements in the economy, households are very demoralized about the
April 26–27, 2011
163 of 244
near-term economic future. Housing and commercial construction are very weak. Like a
number of people, I’m a bit worried about fiscal drag. Next year we will see, for example, the
end of the payroll tax cut, the end of investment expensing, the end of the grants to states and
localities, the end of the extended unemployment insurance, as well as ongoing phase-out of
fiscal stimulus. And so that’s a pretty powerful drag, and it’s going to take some momentum to
overcome that. And in general, I think the momentum seems just a bit weaker, even if the first
quarter overstates the weakness, than it was at the last meeting.
So to summarize, I still expect, broadly speaking, continued recovery at a moderate pace.
I marked down my projections just a little bit.
There was a lot of discussion today of inflation and of easy monetary policy. And while I
agree with many of the points that were made and I understand the concerns, I’d like to make
just a couple of somewhat countervailing points.
It’s true, of course, that headline inflation has increased. As Governor Yellen noted,
quote, “underlying inflation”—and I’ll come back to that—is still quite low. The staff estimate
of the 12-month change in core PCE for this month is still about 0.9; market-based core is 0.9.
The Dallas trimmed mean PCE is 1.0, and the core CPI is 1.2.
Now, President Bullard noted concerns with core, and I agree absolutely that what we’re
interested in is headline inflation. But I think if you look into the price index a bit, you’ll see that
a remarkably large amount of the recent inflation we’ve seen actually is attributable to an
increase in essentially one commodity, which is oil. Moreover, there seems to be a good chance
that the increase will be temporary. So, for example, since our January meeting oil prices are up
$27, which is about 30 percent. Other commodities have risen, but much less. For example,
copper is up 3 percent during that period, wheat is up about 3 percent, corn is up about 15
April 26–27, 2011
164 of 244
percent, but sugar has declined fairly significantly. Oil really stands out as being the commodity
that has increased very significantly. And oil by itself is actually a big source of the pickup in
headline inflation. For example, if you look at PCE inflation and don’t take out energy or food,
rather just take out gasoline and fuel oil, then three-month PCE inflation drops from 4.56 to 2.39,
and the six-month change drops from 3.33 to 1.45. So that one very narrow product category is a
big part of the pickup that we’ve seen recently.
I think there’s a case, as we explain to our students, that this is a relative price increase.
We know some very explicit reasons why oil prices have gone up, why demand has increased
and supply has fallen. Of course, the dollar has also fallen, and there are a number of factors
involved. I think arguably that the relative price effects that we don’t have much control over are
certainly part of that phenomenon, and we know how to address that.
I mention that this is seen as temporary. We all have concerns about futures markets and
so on, but it is striking that as oil prices have risen $27 since January, the far future oil prices
have risen $7.50. There really is a pretty strong presumption in the markets that this oil price
level will be reversed, and you can see the reason, which is that the problems in the Middle East
and North Africa presumably at some point will be reversed. So I just raise that point. It doesn’t
invalidate the concerns about pass-through or about inflation expectations, any of those things.
But I think at least the initial shock here is not really entirely monetary. I think there are some
real factors going on.
The other theme I heard around the table was about how incredibly easy monetary policy
is, and of course, it is easy, but when judging the stance of monetary policy, everything should
be conditional on the state of the economy. The question we want to ask is, “Is the monetary
policy appropriate for the economy?” and not “Is it easy or tight in some absolute sense?” In this
April 26–27, 2011
165 of 244
respect, I was very pleased to see President Kocherlakota’s analysis using Taylor rules, which
gives you a way of thinking about whether interest rates are about where they should be or not.
Now, when I worked with his memo, as I will explain, initially I ended up disagreeing with it,
but then I did some more work and I ended up agreeing with it. So let me just tell you my
thought process, but I think it’s also instructive for thinking about the state of policy and thinking
about where we likely should go over the next year or two.
The underlying assumption in Narayana’s memo is that he uses a Taylor (1999) rule,
which has a 1.0 coefficient on the output gap. In order to create a baseline, he assumes that in
the fourth quarter of last year we were more or less at the right place as far as accommodation is
concerned. I asked the staff to give me their view, based on their assessments of the output gap,
et cetera, and their calculations showed that based on the same Taylor rule and despite the fact
that we were near zero, of course, monetary policy in the fourth quarter of 2010 was still
200 basis points tighter than the Taylor (1999) rule would suggest.
Regarding that gap—and I’m sure Narayana would fully understand it—50 basis points
of it came from what I’ll call the LSAP adjustment. In particular, Narayana assumed 250 basis
points of ease coming from our securities purchases. The staff, particularly Dave Reifschneider,
who was responsible for all of these estimates, suggests that the number in 2010:Q4 was closer
to 200 basis points, a 50 basis point difference. Obviously that’s false precision, but the
200 basis point number was based on more detail about the expected exit strategy in terms of
redemptions and sales. So that’s 50 basis points. The rest of it comes from differences in output
gap estimates; as Narayana pointed out, a lower output gap obviously gives you a higher desired
interest rate.
April 26–27, 2011
166 of 244
Rather than try to adjudicate that difference, I just went ahead and, taking the projections
that we now have, I tried to ask: What does Taylor (1999) tell us about where policy should be?
In order to look forward instead of backward, I looked at the fourth quarter of this year, 2011,
and the fourth quarter of next year, 2012, and that gives you some sense of what the model is
saying in terms of our likely trajectory.
First of all, I had to figure out the output gap. My first stab was to take the middle of the
central tendency of our projections for the fourth quarter of this year, which was 8.55, and to
subtract from that the middle of our long-run NAIRU estimates, which is 5.4. That gave me 3.15
as the unemployment gap. I multiplied that by 2 to get 6.3 percent as the output gap. Thinking
about it now, if you use that, of course, you get very easy policy recommendations and using that
kind of approach suggests that we should still have zero interest rates at the end of 2012. In
thinking about that, I recognize that an objection to that would be that we should probably be
using a higher unemployment rate and higher NAIRU reflecting unemployment insurance and
some temporary factors and so on. So I replaced the 5.4 percent with 6 percent, which is the
staff’s current temporary level of the NAIRU. That gives me an output gap of 5.1 percent in the
fourth quarter of this year, which is essentially the same as where the staff is. They estimate
5.0 percent. So that’s a simple estimate of the gap.
With respect to inflation, I stayed away from core, and what I said was: Let’s look at the
forecast for the following year. What is the forecast for 2012? The middle of the central
tendency of the total PCE inflation forecast for this Committee was 1.6 for 2012. That’s higher
than the core inflation estimates either by the Committee or by the staff, so I used that. It’s a
more conservative number. And I used a goal of 2 for the inflation target.
April 26–27, 2011
167 of 244
An important observation here—and this came up in my earlier exchange with President
Plosser—is that what I call the LSAP adjustment, which is the additional easing being created by
our securities purchases, is going to be waning over time under the baseline Tealbook
assumption that we begin redeeming securities at the end of 2011 and then have slow sales later
on. You have to take that into account, and in particular, when you do that, the LSAP effect for
the fourth quarter of this year is down from 200 to 120 basis points.
Put that all together, Taylor (1999) suggests that the correct level of the funds rate,
inclusive of all securities purchases, for the fourth quarter of this year is minus 50 basis points.
If you do the same analysis for the fourth quarter of 2012, the LSAP correction becomes 70 basis
points. Again, using 6 percent as the NAIRU, what you get for the end of next year is plus
55 basis points.
What this particular guideline—which is, I think, a fairly reasonable framework for
thinking about policy—tells us is qualitatively pretty similar to what Narayana found, which is
that somewhere early in 2012 we should probably be raising interest rates above zero according
to this particular calculation. I’ll come back to weaknesses in just a second. I think it’s striking
that this is actually very close to what the markets are currently expecting; the markets now
expect basically a 37 basis point funds rate in May and a 90 basis point funds rate in
November—pretty close to what I found. So our policy is easy, but at least by one metric, it isn’t
inappropriate, given the state of our economy.
Now, having said all that, I really do not feel sympathetic to John Taylor’s recent view
that we should, more or less, just follow the rule and ignore all other considerations. I think
that’s probably not the right way to make monetary policy, and so let me just mention a few
issues. One is that, of course, you might ask, well, why Taylor (1999). Why not Taylor (1993),
April 26–27, 2011
168 of 244
which has a somewhat smaller coefficient on the output gap? I think it’s important to note that
both of those rules do give you the same long-run results: They both give you 2 percent inflation
in the long term; they both give you U equals U* in the long term. The difference is where you
are in the Taylor curve. And essentially, what that says is that, if you use Taylor (1999), you are
willing to accept a little more volatility in inflation over time in order to smooth out the business
cycle just a bit. It’s not an issue of allowing a higher inflation target.
The question then might be: What has the Fed actually done? If you look at rolling
regressions that try to estimate the Taylor rule for the Fed, the current estimates of the long-run
coefficients are 0.94 for the output gap and 1.73 for inflation, which is almost exactly the 1999
Taylor rule, and you get the same results if you use the data before 2001; it’s not just a product
of the 2001–03 period. One other observation is that this does assume a pretty strong effect for
LSAPs. So if you actually don’t think LSAPs were very effective, then you need to be a lot
more dovish than you are now, because you’re taking away a couple hundred basis points of
effective ease.
Of course, one of the reasons that you wouldn’t want to use a Taylor rule without some
additional insight is that, of course, it’s way too simple, and I have a long list of objections here.
Let me just mention one that this Committee is very concerned about. Taylor rules have nothing
in them, as we mentioned today, related to inflation expectations and they have nothing in them
related to asset price bubbles. When you see things like that, you to want to be a little bit more
restrictive.
Again, I think we have to watch out for those things. I think we do have to look at what’s
going on in the economy and use our judgment, but I just want to push back a little bit on the
view that monetary policy is radically easy and that we need to waste no time moving—you
April 26–27, 2011
169 of 244
know, by 8 o’clock tonight, we should basically have the funds rate up to 100 basis points. It’s
true that monetary policy is easy in an absolute sense, but relative to where the economy is, a
standard analysis suggests that we are not particularly inappropriate and that, indeed, easy policy
would be justified for some time to come.
Again, let me just end by saying two things. One is that I don’t believe in simple rules as
superseding thought, and I think we do have to consider issues like the ones that President
Hoenig has raised, for example. And the other is, again, to thank Narayana for bringing this into
the conversation. We will be making a lot more progress if we think quantitatively about when
we should move, what conditions should cause us to move, and how easy or tight monetary
policy ought to be.
Okay. Thank you very much. I understand that a reception is just now beginning for exGovernor Warsh, followed by dinner. If you have any changes in your projections, please
provide them as soon as possible. We will be reconvening at 8:30 tomorrow morning. Thank
you.
[Meeting recessed]
April 26–27, 2011
170 of 244
April 27 Session
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Good morning, everybody. I’m going to start the meeting
today by completing the go-round from yesterday. I’ll give you my quick summary of the
discussion on the economy.
As a diversion while we’re doing that, we’re going to have some photos taken. We’ve
learned that photos not taken during the meeting have much jollification going on.
MR. LACKER. So we should act naturally.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Well, act your usual spiteful selves. [Laughter] Okay. So
again, thank you for the useful go-round yesterday.
Participants generally see the continuation of a moderate recovery, strengthening
somewhat over time, notwithstanding a surprisingly weak first quarter and some ongoing
headwinds. Businesses remain relatively optimistic, although they remain concerned about the
effects of higher commodity prices both in their own costs and on the buying power of
consumers. The labor market is somewhat stronger, with payrolls and vacancies up and
unemployment down. State and local fiscal contraction and possibly future federal fiscal
consolidation are shaping up to be a possible drag on growth. The debt limit also poses some
financial risk. International factors are affecting the U.S. economy, including disruptions in the
Middle East and North Africa, which, together with a lack of compensating production by Saudi
Arabia, are affecting oil prices; the impact of the Japanese disaster on supply chains; and higher
inflation and wage costs in emerging markets. Europe is still grappling with sovereign debt
problems. Oil prices are a particularly important downside risk for growth, although the level of
oil prices does not yet qualify as a Hamilton shock. On net, the risks to economic growth seem
roughly balanced. On the inflation front, increases in food and especially energy prices have led
April 26–27, 2011
171 of 244
to a recent acceleration. In light of uncertainties, both about how commodity prices will behave
and the extent of potential pass-through to other prices, inflation risks seem to the upside.
Consumers are in a negative mood—a crisis of confidence?—with higher gas and food
prices offsetting the payroll tax cut. However, growth in consumer spending remains moderate,
and retailers in some areas are seeing increased sales and traffic. Labor market conditions are
mixed. Hiring is weak, though firms may be forced into the labor market as they reach the end
of productivity gains. There are upside wage pressures for a few specialized types of workers.
On the other hand, there may be significant disguised unemployment, and fieldwork suggests
that many of the unemployed see very little prospect for reemployment at a job comparable to
the one that they had before. Housing remains generally distressed, with prices flat to down,
though sales volume and traffic were reported higher in a few areas.
For the most part, as noted, businesses continue to show confidence in the recovery.
Investment in equipment and software is up. Many producers are facing powerful cost pressures,
some of which they have already, or plan to, pass on to consumers. They have little fat in their
operations, so that passing through cost increases is the only way to protect margins. Among key
sectors, manufacturing, energy, agriculture, transportation and logistics, and tourism were
reported strong. Manufacturers in particular are upbeat, except that some auto producers are
having difficulty obtaining parts normally produced in Japan.
Financial conditions have improved a bit further. Earnings are strong, and equities are
doing well. Banks are seeing better credit quality but are concerned about top-line revenues.
Loans to small businesses are up, and there is substantial competition among banks to make C&I
loans. Risks to financial stability exist, including greater leverage and risk-taking in areas such
as leveraged loans and land acquisition. Excess liquidity may be a source of this problem.
April 26–27, 2011
172 of 244
As noted, inflation has risen very significantly in recent months primarily because of
energy prices and, to a lesser extent, to other commodity prices. Underlying inflation measures
remain low, however. The degree of pass-through into underlying inflation measures for
commodity costs will be an important variable to watch, as many firms report that they believe at
least some of their cost increases can be passed on. For example, prices-received indexes are up.
Some participants supported—and presented econometric evidence for—the view that ongoing
slack in labor markets has restrained wages and unit labor costs, limiting second-round effects
and likely causing the inflation bulge to be temporary. Inflation expectations by some measures
are up a bit. Forward inflation breakevens have increased somewhat to levels near the top of
recent ranges by some measures, although the Cleveland expectations measure remains below
2 percent. Public attention to inflation has increased, which may give firms “cover” to pass on
costs. The lack of theory on how monetary policy should respond to inflation expectations is an
important gap. The increase in inflation will in the end be transitory if commodity prices
stabilize and pass-through is limited. However, close monitoring of inflation and inflation
expectations is essential to prevent any more lasting pickup in the rate of price increases.
So that’s my summary. Any comments? [No response] Seeing no comments, before we
go on to the policy round, David Wilcox, I believe you have some data to report.
MR. WILCOX. Yes. The advanced report on durables was received this morning. We
obviously haven’t had a chance to look at it carefully, but we were looking for a strong report.
At first blush, it looks like we got one, and our preliminary take is that it should leave our
projection about unchanged for the first quarter.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Any questions? [No response] All right. Then
we’re ready to go to our monetary policy go-round, and I’ll call on Bill English to start us off.
April 26–27, 2011
173 of 244
MR. ENGLISH. 5 Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I will be referring to the package
labeled “Material for FOMC Briefing on Monetary Policy Alternatives” that was
distributed earlier. The package includes the three draft statements, including the
changes that we distributed on Monday, along with associated draft directives.
Turning first to alternative B on page 3, notwithstanding the softer-than-expected
tone of the indicators for the first quarter, Committee members may see the outlook
for real activity and inflation going forward as about in line with their expectations at
the time of the March meeting, and so believe that no change in the near-term course
for monetary policy is called for. Policymakers may anticipate that higher energy and
other commodity prices will boost headline inflation only temporarily because they
see commodity prices leveling out and longer-term inflation expectations remaining
stable. Moreover, because higher commodity prices reduce real incomes and damp
consumer spending, policymakers may feel that the monetary policy implications of
the resulting higher inflation are countered by weaker output and employment,
suggesting that no adjustment to the trajectory for policy is necessary.
More broadly, policymakers may see unemployment as too high and likely to
remain so for some time, as suggested by your SEP submissions. And, as discussed
yesterday, a number of potential measures of underlying inflation have moved up
from their lows, but remain around 1 percent. Indeed, most of you project PCE
inflation in 2012 to be below your estimate of its mandate-consistent level in the
longer run, and only three of you see it coming in higher. You may also judge that
longer-term inflation expectations are not that different, on balance, than at the time
of the March meeting. The Michigan survey median 5-to-10-year inflation
expectations measure reversed its March rise and is in the middle of its range over the
past several years. The Board staff’s forward measure of inflation compensation
from nominal and indexed Treasury yields has fallen back in recent days and is now
up less than 10 basis points, on net, since March and remains within the range seen
since the crisis. Against this backdrop, you may believe it is appropriate to complete
the current asset purchase program at the end of June and wait for additional
information on output, inflation, and inflation expectations before deciding on your
next step.
As for the statement language, the first paragraph would be updated to suggest
somewhat less confidence in the strength of the recovery and would acknowledge that
overall inflation has picked up in recent months. Depending on your assessment of
the market- and survey-based measures of inflation expectations, you might want to
soften a bit the statement that “longer-term measures of inflation expectations have
remained stable” by adding the word “generally” that is shown in brackets. With
Monday’s changes, paragraph 2 has been updated to clarify that higher commodity
prices have increased headline inflation, but the Committee continues to anticipate
that inflation will fall back to mandate-consistent levels over time. Finally, in
paragraph 3, the statement would indicate that the Committee “will complete” the
$600 billion of intended purchases announced in November. It would go on to note
5
The materials used by Mr. English are appended to this transcript (appendix 5).
April 26–27, 2011
174 of 244
that “the Committee will regularly review the size and composition of its securities
holdings in light of incoming information and is prepared to adjust those holdings as
needed to best foster maximum employment and price stability.”
A statement along the lines of alternative B would be about in line with market
expectations and would probably have little effect on asset prices. However, if the
reference to longer-term inflation expectations being only “generally” stable were
included, market participants would likely expect a somewhat more rapid shift to
removing policy accommodation, particularly since the conditioning assumptions in
the “extended period” language in paragraph 4 include “stable inflation expectations.”
The result would likely be some upward pressure on interest rates and perhaps the
foreign exchange value of the dollar, and a modest decline in stock prices.
Alternative C, page 4, might be appropriate if the Committee were more
concerned that the recent rise in inflation may not prove transitory, believed that the
economy was on a solid growth trajectory, and perhaps also saw output as closer to
potential than the staff projects. The intended size of the asset purchase program
would be cut to $450 billion and the statement language adjusted to signal that
redemptions and an increase in the federal funds rate target could come sooner than
markets currently anticipate. You may be worried that the higher prices for oil and
other commodities could, in a context of accommodative monetary policy and large
federal deficits, lead to an increase in longer-term inflation expectations that would be
very costly to reverse later on. If so, you might judge that bringing the purchase
program to a rapid close and signaling that you intend to move toward exit relatively
expeditiously could lead to improved medium-term macroeconomic outcomes. Some
of you may also find a reduction in policy accommodation attractive because of
concerns about signs of potential asset price misalignments or increased leverage in
some parts of the financial system that could contribute to financial instability.
The statement under alternative C would provide a somewhat more upbeat
assessment of current conditions and the outlook than that under alternative B, noting
that the recovery “is on a firm footing” and that conditions in the labor market “are
improving.” The inflation discussion in paragraph 1 is the same as in alternative B,
but paragraph 2 puts greater emphasis on the importance of the stability of longerterm inflation expectations in ensuring that the recent rise in overall inflation is
temporary. Paragraph 3 scales back the size of the asset purchase program, and the
statement would also indicate that reinvestments of principal would continue only
“for now” and that the Committee anticipates “exceptionally low levels” of the
federal funds rate for “some time,” rather than for an “extended period.”
Alternative C would surprise market participants and would likely lead to an
increase in longer-term interest rates, lower stock prices, and a rise in the foreign
exchange value of the dollar.
Alternative A, page 2, might be seen as appropriate if policymakers see the
weaker pace of the recovery of late as likely to persist, or if they see greater downside
risks to the outlook for economic growth, arising, for example, from the possible
April 26–27, 2011
175 of 244
effects of higher energy and other commodity prices on household spending. In this
environment, members may think that a move toward easier policy is more likely than
one toward tighter policy over coming months, and that emphasizing that the door is
open to additional policy accommodation could reassure households and businesses
and so support the recovery, even if no policy change were ultimately required.
The statement for alternative A would note that the recovery is proceeding at a
moderate pace, but more slowly than had been anticipated at the time of the March
meeting. It would also note that higher energy costs may be weighing on household
spending. Paragraphs 1 and 2 would suggest somewhat less concern about inflation
expectations and the inflation outlook than in alternative B. Paragraph 2 would also
note increasing downside risks to the outlook for economic growth. Paragraph 3
would confirm that the Committee “will complete” its purchases of $600 billion of
longer-term Treasury securities and that it is “prepared to expand and extend the
purchase program” if needed to achieve its objectives. The fourth paragraph would
provide more-explicit forward guidance about the expected path for the federal funds
rate by specifying that exceptionally low levels were likely “at least through mid2012.”
Market participants would be surprised by the adoption of alternative A. Interest
rates and the foreign exchange value of the dollar would likely fall, and stock prices
would probably increase.
Draft directives for the three alternatives are presented on pages 6 through 8 of
your handout. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. That completes my prepared remarks.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you very much. Are there questions for Bill?
President Evans.
MR. EVANS. Maybe I shouldn’t have been surprised. Maybe I should have studied this
a little more carefully, but in alternative B, there’s new language relative to what was put in the
Tealbook; in paragraph 2: “Other commodities have pushed up inflation in recent months.” I
noticed in your analysis you referred to it as headline inflation. It seems like a noticeable change
in our assessment.
MR. LACKER. Which part? Paragraph 2?
MR. EVANS. Paragraph 2. We say, “measures of underlying inflation continue to be
somewhat low” and then we say that increases in energy prices have pushed up inflation in
recent months. Then we’re going to say “and a decline in inflation to rates consistent with” our
April 26–27, 2011
176 of 244
mandate. So we’re now talking about inflation being too high relative to our mandate, whereas
we’ve had an extended discussion about inflation being low relative to our mandate. It seems it
needs some modifier like “headline inflation” or “near-term inflation” or something.
MR. LACKER. Wouldn’t “inflation” without a modifier be presumed to refer to
headline, and a modifier be presumed to be required to refer to something else, like core or
underlying or forecast?
MR. EVANS. Inflation is a general rise in all prices, and we’re pointing to a relative
price increase as moving inflation. So I think it’s a very subtle point.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I think we’re anticipating the discussion. The origin of this
change was actually President Lacker’s memo, which was circulated. And yes, again, “inflation”
is intended here as headline inflation, as distinguished from underlying, and President Lacker’s
memo made the point that, instead of talking about the general term in the context of price
stability, we could talk about the desire to have overall inflation come back down to what we
think is the appropriate level. But this is obviously open to discussion in the go-round. So why
don’t we just do it in that context?
Any other questions for Bill? [No response] All right. If not, President Williams, you’re
first.
MR. WILLIAMS. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I favor alternative B. Although we’re
experiencing a bulge in headline inflation—I guess I used “headline”—underlying inflation
remains low, and our forecast is that overall inflation will fall well below desired levels next
year, and I expect significant resource utilization gaps to continue for quite some time.
Therefore, the current very accommodative stance in monetary policy remains entirely
appropriate.
April 26–27, 2011
177 of 244
In terms of the wording in the statement, I actually like the changes that were made over
the weekend and in the Monday draft. I think it is important to recognize that inflation is above
desired levels currently and explain that we expect that to come down. I would also maintain the
description of longer-term inflation expectations as “stable” rather than “generally stable.” I
think this is an important point, as Bill mentioned. Both survey and market-based measures are
within the ranges that have prevailed over the past decade, and I think we should be careful not
to change the language on something important like this based on what has proven at times to be
volatile data. We see that in the Michigan survey; it popped up, and then it has come back down.
We’ve also seen that in the breakeven inflation. So I definitely would keep the word “stable.”
Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you very much. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I believe there are reasonably strong
arguments for choosing alternative C from a certain point of view and not providing further
stimulus at this time. The recovery seems well established, and price stability often requires
preemption, especially at this time of the business cycle. Despite those arguments, though, I can
support alternative B. We’ve encountered enough speed bumps in this recovery to make cutting
back on stimulus perhaps less urgent right now. In addition, in our discussion of exit strategies, I
didn’t hear any convincing reasons to doubt that we could withdraw stimulus at a fairly rapid clip
if need be, and I take it as a corollary of doing whatever it takes to provide sufficient stimulus
that we stand ready to withdraw stimulus at whatever pace is required to keep inflation well
contained as the expansion unfolds.
Regarding language, I did, indeed, make three suggestions regarding paragraph 2(b), two
of which were adopted in this draft. The motivation was to provide, similar to President
April 26–27, 2011
178 of 244
Kocherlakota’s suggestion last time, more connection to real life in our description of inflation.
It just seemed to me “currently putting upward pressure on inflation” was more consistent with
an overall inflation rate that hadn’t risen yet and was threatening to, and yet we’d had so many
months of inflation well above what we want that it was worth acknowledging to the public that
we understand that inflation is, indeed, too high right now, and why.
And about relative price changes, President Evans, I understand that when oil prices go
up much more rapidly than other prices, it’s a relative price change, but if it brings the average
up, then it’s inflation as well, and you can’t deny that. I mean, if there aren’t offsetting declines
in other prices that keep the average constant, one is equally entitled to call it an increase in
overall inflation as well.
I also was concerned about this language about underlying inflation. I think it’s widely
interpreted as a code word for core inflation, and I had two concerns about sentence 2. One of
the main ones is that rather than relying on the notion of overall inflation converging to what we
think of as underlying inflation over time, why not communicate that we think the rise in
inflation is transitory; why not come out and say, “We expect inflation to decline soon”? It
struck me as more clear to say it that way. The other thing is that sentence 2 is one of the five
places we refer to the mandate in this statement, and we say underlying inflation is low relative
to what the Committee judges—I’m not sure we’ve ever spelled out underlying inflation and
made clear that it’s our forecast and not core. My concern with sentence 2 is that it’s open to
misinterpretation that our interpretation of the mandate has to do with core rather than overall
inflation. Evidently there were countervailing concerns about sentence 2. I’m anxious to hear
what they were.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Rosengren.
April 26–27, 2011
179 of 244
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B. Given the
weakness in spending over this quarter, there remains significant uncertainty about the strength
of the recovery. Furthermore, by the end of 2013, I expect unemployment to be too high and
inflation to be too low, even assuming completion of the Treasury securities purchase program
and keeping the federal funds rate at the zero lower bound longer than in the Tealbook.
I continue to see many downside risks to the outlook. Problems in Europe, fiscal
austerity measures, tightening in emerging markets, and weakness in the first quarter in
consumption, local government spending, and housing could spill over into future quarters. Any
one of these factors could exert enough drag on future growth to put my forecast at serious risk.
Given the low inflation rate, we have plenty of room to encourage faster growth in the
economy. I hope the economy is strong enough that we can begin removing accommodation by
allowing redemptions in the late fall, but that depends on receiving stronger data than we have
seen so far this year.
In terms of language, I share President Evans’s concern—I actually like the previous
language in that sentence better.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B. I’m not
totally happy with paragraph 2 as written. I think it’s an attempt to be what the younger folks
might call a mash-up between President Lacker’s version and the original. At the risk of
confusing things still more, let me make a suggestion, which would be to drop the last part that’s
highlighted in red—the “and a decline in inflation to rates consistent with the Federal Reserve’s
mandate”—and replace it with “in a context of price stability.”
April 26–27, 2011
180 of 244
I think what’s confusing about the paragraph right now is, we talk about underlying
inflation being low, then inflation goes up to being high, and then we’re talking about what we
want it to come down to be. I find the paragraph confusing when I read it. I think my suggestion
may be more helpful, but maybe others will have ideas about how to address this.
MR. TARULLO. Narayana, you’d keep Jeff’s first change and revert to the original
language for the second?
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. That is correct, yes.
MR. LACKER. Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. On the seesaw pattern of referring to low inflation and high inflation—
my suggestion would have eliminated references to inflation in sentence 2, which would
eliminate the up-down.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. I remember that.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I don’t want to interject, but it may help a little bit to know
that in my remarks to the media later today, I’m going to be focusing very much on the
projections, including the near-term projections vis-à-vis the longer-term objectives of the
Committee, so I think there will be more opportunity to explain this particular configuration than
would otherwise be the case. That’s a central goal of my presentation. President Hoenig.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. I’m sorry, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. As I think about the evolution of future policy, I continue to
focus my attention on core inflation. Core inflation was under 1 percent over the course of 2010.
April 26–27, 2011
181 of 244
Our estimates in Minneapolis are that the output gap was around minus 4 percent at the
end of 2010, and given these conditions, as you highlighted, Mr. Chairman, it’s appropriate for
monetary policy to be highly accommodative, and it is. The Board of Governors’ staff estimates
suggest that the LSAPs are generating enough stimulus so as to be roughly equivalent to a fed
funds rate of minus 2½ percentage points. I guess there’s some range between minus 2 and
minus 2½, but I’ll stick to the rough equivalence.
Now, some observers have suggested that this level of stimulus should remain in place as
long as inflation expectations remain stable, but such an approach is inconsistent with the kind of
rules we have in the Tealbook, and they’re inconsistent for a good reason. If we waited until
inflation expectations move, we’d actually probably have to impose much bigger employment
costs on the economy to try to get them back to where we want them to be. So it’s, I think, a
better policy to adjust our level of accommodation as the economy moves towards the Fed’s
targets. The staff now forecasts that core PCE inflation will be 1.4 percent in 2011. My own
forecast is slightly higher, and these kinds of increases in core PCE inflation would argue for a
reduction in accommodation.
At the same time, unemployment will be at least 1 percentage point lower at the end of
2011 than in November 2010. This change, too, argues for a reduction in accommodation—and
I think Governor Tarullo made some good points yesterday—assuming, of course, that the
natural rate of unemployment did not fall by as much over the same time frame.
Mr. Chairman, I found your comments on my memo to be very helpful yesterday. In
particular, I have to say that I had really underappreciated the notion that accommodation is
being removed as we move closer to a date when our holdings of longer-term securities return to
a more normal level. I think this idea is a very important one and a very intuitive one.
April 26–27, 2011
182 of 244
If I’m sitting there as a member of the public thinking the Fed is going to hold onto their
long-term securities for 30 years, and six months pass, well, not much accommodation is being
removed by that. But if I’m thinking it’s going to be more like three years that the Fed is holding
onto those securities, when six months pass, then there’s a fair amount of accommodation being
removed. This really points to the need to have some strong communication about what our
expectations are for the date of eventual balance sheet normalization when our holdings in longterm securities return to something consistent with what we think of as being normal.
There’s a variety of ways we could do that communication. We could do it during the
press conferences. I heard, and I don’t want to overstate this, a fair amount of agreement among
members of the Committee that we were planning to get back to something like a normal balance
sheet over a five- to six-year time frame. But another way to do it would be to add a projection.
We offer our projections of longer-run inflation; we could offer a projection of a date that we
expect balance sheet normalization to take place. Right now, though, the communication is
proceeding in a rather informal way. I think our main communication is President Williams’s
working paper, and that’s probably not the best way for us to communicate these things, with all
due respect. [Laughter] But I do continue to anticipate that in the fall the Committee will need
to respond to the changes in economic conditions by taking the first steps toward raising the fed
funds rate. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. There have been several good suggestions
about how we might change the projections, and I’m sure the Subcommittee will be eager to dig
into those.
MS. YELLEN. Will do.
April 26–27, 2011
183 of 244
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Yet another possible suggestion, of course, is to project the
funds rate itself.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Oh, that is a good suggestion.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Hoenig.
MR. HOENIG. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I prefer alternative C. Economic growth, as
I’ve said many times, will most likely continue to be moderate, as consumers and businesses and
financial institutions balance their increasing spending motives with the need to deleverage,
which is in process and has to take place. This process will take time, and maintaining a zero
policy rate, I think, invites future imbalances that will undermine longer-term growth, which is
our mandate. Inflation is increasing. Energy and food inflation have been especially notable,
obviously. The broader inflation measures are moving higher as well. I am concerned that
maintaining our highly accommodative policy stance amid a recovering economy, even though
modest, and rising underlying inflation puts us behind the curve and risks a repeat of the policy
mistakes of the ’70s and the 2000s. We are just inviting trouble by staying too low too long.
To rebalance the risks to the outlook, we need to rebalance our monetary policy, and I
would start modestly, by taking the “extended period” language out. And I’d also at least
consider seriously stopping our investments at the $450 billion number. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Our second round of LSAPs is nearing its
scheduled conclusion in June. I was not in favor of this policy when it was implemented in
November, but I see little to be gained at this point of ending it early. We are almost done.
As we discussed last time, I thought it important that our April statement signal that
LSAPs will end in June, and alternative B, paragraph 3, does that. In general, I do prefer the
April 26–27, 2011
184 of 244
language in alternative C, but like President Lacker, I can live with something closer to B.
However, I would like the statement to go somewhat further in preparing the public for exit and
giving the Committee more flexibility, so that it can act sooner rather than later, if necessary. I
think this is a good time to begin changing the language. Because the Chairman is having a
press briefing after this meeting and the next meeting, it gives us opportunities to make moreextensive language changes in the statement than we might feel comfortable doing otherwise.
The Chairman will be able to explain what we mean by our changes rather than letting the public
divine what we meant.
First, I think we should take the opportunity when the LSAPs end in June to also stop
reinvestments of MBS. We should signal this in the statement by saying the Committee will
complete $600 billion of longer-term Treasury purchases by the end of the quarter, and at that
time intends to end the policy of reinvesting principal payments from securities. The market has
reacted quite benignly to the Treasury sales of MBS. I don’t anticipate such an adverse reaction
to our announcement that investments will end, and it will help prepare the public for our
eventual exit. I think paragraph 4 is becoming more problematic, given the inflation and
inflation expectation numbers. Are inflation trends really subdued? Are inflation expectations
really stable? I think we should consider adjusting the language, if not today, then in June. Is
“extended period” consistent with potentially raising the funds rate, as President Kocherlakota
suggested, by year-end?
Even the Tealbook puts a nonnegligible chance of raising rates this year, although the
point forecast suggests a longer period before liftoff. We don’t want to mislead the public, but
paragraph 4, I’m afraid, might do that. Instead, I think we could say, “The Committee will
maintain the target rate of the federal funds rate from 0 to ¼ percent today, and based on its
April 26–27, 2011
185 of 244
outlook for the economy and inflation, anticipates that it will remain low for some time to
come.” This works, because paragraph 2 discusses our outlook for inflation—the fact that we
expect the effects of higher energy and commodity prices to have transitory effects on general
inflation. And paragraph 1 explains that labor market conditions are improving. Because we are
releasing new forecasts at the press briefing, changing the language to refer to projections seems
sensible.
I would also note that among the various policy rules in the Tealbook, the so-called
growth rate or first-difference rules suggest that the funds rate should be about 50 basis points
this quarter and 90 basis points by the third quarter. Of course, different rules give different
guidance, and I have argued before why I like something more like the first-difference rule, in
part because of measurement problems, but I won’t repeat those arguments today.
A couple of wording choices we talked about last time could be implemented today and
explained during the press conference. I would like us to consider changing paragraph 2 so that
it refers to—and I raised this point last time—“employment” or “unemployment” rather than the
“unemployment rate.” Our mandate is in terms of maximum employment, not the
unemployment rate. Labor force participation rates are a variable we have even less control over
than we do employment. By emphasizing the unemployment rate, we risk giving the idea that
we won’t begin exiting until the unemployment rate is back down to the natural rate. But this is
misleading. I believe we will need to act before the unemployment rate gets back down to a
normal level.
I think alternative C’s characterization of where the economy is relative to our dual
mandate—namely, that employment and inflation have moved somewhat closer to the levels that
the Committee judges is mandate consistent—rings truer than paragraph 2 in alternative B,
April 26–27, 2011
186 of 244
which seems to brush aside the recent increases in inflation and inflation forecasts. That is why I
generally prefer alternative C.
We also should consider clarifying what we mean by underlying inflation. As President
Lacker was suggesting, we had this conversation last time as well. I think we have some concept
of inflation over the medium run, not just core inflation in mind. So why don’t we say that,
rather than referring to underlying inflation?
I’m also worried that claiming expectations remain stable may not be entirely credible.
Indeed, some have argued that, in fact, expectations of inflation have risen, reflecting the abating
concerns about deflation. Five-year, five-year TIPS have risen considerably since last fall, and
so to say that inflation expectations are stable may be a little bit awkward. In fact, if we recall,
we wanted to get them up somewhat since last fall.
So I would suggest that the last sentence of paragraph 1 reads something like as follows:
“Inflation has picked up in recent months, but longer-term inflation expectations remain within
historical norms, and indicators of inflation over the medium term are subdued.” I think that
language would fit well with the Chairman’s emphasis on our forecast in his press conference,
and he could get away from using underlying inflation.
MR. TARULLO. Can you read that again, Charlie?
MR. PLOSSER. “Inflation has picked up in recent months, but longer-term inflation
expectations remain within historical norms, and indicators of inflation over the medium run are
subdued.”
MR. TARULLO. Thanks.
MR. PLOSSER. I think communication and transparency are very important policy tools
at this point. This will be especially true as we choreograph our exit of this period of
April 26–27, 2011
187 of 244
accommodation. The changes in language that I am suggesting are some of those I believe that
we might need to implement in the next couple of meetings to prepare the public for the start of
an eventual exit. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. And that indicators of what remain subdued, at the end?
Sorry.
MR. PLOSSER. “Indicators of inflation over the medium run remain subdued.” As
opposed to “underlying inflation,” and that would play into the forecast language.
MR. LACKER. Which medium run, past or the future—going which way?
MR. PLOSSER. I’m thinking future. Or you could say, “forecast of inflation over the
medium run.” That’s why this language “underlying inflation” is confusing, because it’s
interpreted as core. What you are really talking about is your predictions of where inflation is
going.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. That’s fair. We have a lot of work to do, I think. Your
particular suggestion is very interesting, but it would also require work in the second paragraph,
too.
MR. PLOSSER. Yes, because “underlying” shows up there as well.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Right. Thank you. President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. The Committee decision on asset
purchases obviously was made at the November meeting. We said that that decision is subject to
review, depending on developments in the economy. Today, the economic outlook is generally
better than what was expected at the time of the November decision. In addition, the inflation
outlook is somewhat less benign than it was at the time of the November decision. First-quarter
GDP will probably come in weaker than what was expected earlier this year, but, as the
April 26–27, 2011
188 of 244
economic go-round yesterday indicated, many believe that the outlook for the remainder of 2011
remains relatively robust. Also, many comments suggested that the Q1 GDP weakness seems
inconsistent with other measures of the strength of the economy. So, the November decision was
considered reviewable. We’ve got a stronger economy than we had thought at the time, and
we’ve got a little bit higher inflation and inflation expectations than we thought at the time. This
suggests to me making a small move to adjust the policy, and in this respect I would agree with
some of the comments made by President Kocherlakota.
Now, I know that there are objections around the table to making small moves, and so
I’m going to disabuse you of those objections. [Laughter] Many of the comments yesterday all
around the table suggest that we set a high bar for this type of policy action—a high bar. I want
to argue that this is the wrong intuition for Committee behavior. It is bureaucratically convenient
but unlikely to be optimal policy.
The high-bar argument suggests not taking action unless it is absolutely called for. So
there is a bias toward inaction. This is known in engineering and elsewhere as an Ss policy.
You only act when certain limits are met on the high side or the low side. If you behave this
way, this will create a range of inaction; you’ll take no action in the middle, and you will take
one action if you go above the high limit and one action if you go below the low limit. If the
limits are extreme, which they might be for a Committee like this, the range of inaction is
actually quite large. The example would be driving a car and steering and trying to stay in your
lane. When we’re driving our car, we are making small adjustments all the time as we are
steering, but if you had an Ss policy, you might say, “I am only going to adjust the steering when
the car actually goes to the very edge of the lane, and then I will make the adjustment to come
back to the center.” You have a range of inaction. You don’t adjust the steering wheel at all
April 26–27, 2011
189 of 244
until you actually hit the limit, then you come back to the middle. If you drove like that, you
would have a more volatile path down the highway than you do when you are making small
adjustments all the time. In the car example, the cost to action is very small, so you might as
well make adjustments all the time. This keeps you in the middle of the lane, and you throw out
the Ss policy. It wouldn’t be the right thing to do. The Ss policy is not optimal unless there are
some significant fixed costs to action. But for a Committee like this, I think there are no real
costs of this type. We can make small adjustments if we want. Creating this range of inaction
through a de facto Ss policy is less than optimal for this Committee. I also think this creates
confusion in markets, because in many circumstances where the economy has changed we don’t
actually do anything in the range of inaction. This just leaves a big question mark out there in
the private sector. They’re saying, “Well, what are these guys doing? They’re not doing
anything.” The private sector doesn’t get any signal when we are sitting in the range of inaction.
And you might say, “Well, we are always talking.” I don’t think talking matters. What they care
about is whether or not we taking concrete action. The communication can only help explain the
actions that you actually take or plan to take. It can’t be a substitute for actually making the
decision to take concrete action.
So with that, I am going to support option B with the caveat of completing $500 billion of
asset purchases instead of the $600 billion. I think that the situation that we are in is that the
FOMC apparently intends to go on hold at the end of June. Going on hold to me would mean
that we keep the near-zero policy rate, we keep the “extended period” language, we keep the size
of the balance sheet held constant, and we create a bit of a presumption, because we’re going on
pause, that the next policy move would be to remove accommodation without really committing
to that and waiting for more information to come in. And all of that seems entirely sensible to
April 26–27, 2011
190 of 244
me. But I think finishing our asset purchases just a bit short of where we said in November
would still be planning to go on hold in June in the same way I just described, but with a slightly
smaller balance sheet. This would help send a signal to markets that we are paying attention to
recent developments. We’d still be going on hold in June, but there would not be quite as much
accommodation through the asset purchase program as what we initially planned. Also, doing it
this way wouldn’t signal the next move, except that the next move is presumably, since you’re
going on pause, to remove accommodation, if the economy continues to perform as expected.
Many of you have noted the risks out there, and those could, of course, move against us. I think
that doing something like this might help us. I have no illusions about adopting this, but I think
if we played it this way, this might help the FOMC during the May–June time frame.
And on that, I want to make some remarks on Vice Chairman Dudley’s comments
yesterday, which I thought were very helpful in this regard. We do face an environment of rising
inflation expectations. It’s not terrible, but further increases along this dimension would be
unwelcome; we’ve got two months to go before the June meeting. The fiscal stalemate is not
helpful to us and is hurting inflation expectations in this regard. The dollar is weakening pretty
substantially, and I am a little concerned that the dollar, even though there are a lot of crises
around the world, is not really viewed as a very good safe haven in the last few months.
Investors are flocking to traditional inflation hedges. A lot of that doesn’t make any sense to me,
but I think it is some investor behavior to pay attention to. You’ve got the ECB tightening with
us not really signaling that we are going to follow anytime soon.
All of this is very manageable, but July 1 is a long way away, and I’m a little worried that
things could get a little bit away from us during the intermeeting period, and signaling a little bit
toward less accommodation might be a bit helpful. I think that another problem for us is that
April 26–27, 2011
191 of 244
June will not be a good moment to act, because in June our asset purchases will be wrapped up.
The way the discussion is going now—and depending on how the economy performs—we’re
evidently planning to end the program there and go on hold, so that won’t be a good meeting to
take any other action. I think the meeting to do this is now.
Let me comment for just a minute on our uber-easy monetary policy. It is very easy in
absolute terms. It’s also appropriately easy, conditional on the state of the economy. I do agree
with this, although Taylor rule calculations can be sensitive to details, as our Tealbook shows,
and as the literature certainly shows.
The main idea about describing our policy as very easy is that it is going to take a long
time to normalize policy. You’ve got zero rates, and you’ve got a large balance sheet. Those
things take a long time to normalize. It may be prudent for the Committee to get started at some
point, so that policy adjustment can be more gradual, and we can adjust the pace of removing
accommodation according to events. We can take pauses at some point. Then the Committee
may not have to move as aggressively later. So I think there is something to consider in the fact
that policy is very easy in absolute terms.
I just want to caution everybody that these Taylor rules also are calibrated using data
from the Great Moderation time frame which had relatively small shocks to the economy,
certainly a different situation than what we have today. So we may want to supplement those
calculations with some judgment about how the situation has changed versus, say, the 1990s or
the 2000s. I agree with President Plosser on difference rules, which get rid of the gap-type
problem and let you calibrate policy without having to know what the gap measure is. Those
rules are all subject to many technical qualifications, but I think they are important.
April 26–27, 2011
192 of 244
Also, I want to stress that the 2004 to 2006 tightening is certainly questionable. Many
view it as having been too slow, too mechanical, and possibly having allowed bubbles which
caused problems. These are some of the points that have been repeatedly stressed here by
President Hoenig and for which I have some sympathy. That kind of bubble argument doesn’t
come into—and the Chairman mentioned this yesterday—the normal Taylor-rule calculation,
because it’s just not part of the model. So we have to pay a lot of attention to that going forward.
The bottom line is that there is plenty to mull in this unprecedented situation for
monetary policy, and I just wanted to make a few of these points during my chance for the policy
discussion here. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you, President Bullard. President Pianalto.
MS. PIANALTO. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B. In general terms,
my outlook is not that dramatically different than it was in March. My forecast is for moderate
output growth, unemployment rates that remain elevated, and core inflation rates that are still
below our mandate-consistent levels.
Like the Tealbook, I revised up my projection for core PCE inflation. This revision
moved up my expected date for the first increase in the fed funds rate by one or two meetings.
However, my outlook is still consistent with the “extended period” language in alternative B.
While my outlook does not support the quicker policy response offered by alternative C, I
am concerned about the upside risk to inflation. Temporarily high headline inflation presents a
price stability risk if we’re not able to keep longer term inflation expectations anchored.
Fortunately, as I mentioned yesterday, a range of financial market indicators suggests that
longer-term inflation expectations remain mandate consistent, and, in my view, I think we need
to maintain those expectations right where they are.
April 26–27, 2011
193 of 244
I would not use “generally” in front of “inflation expectations” in the last sentence in
paragraph 1. I would leave it as it is. I also think that providing greater clarity on our exit
strategy would help us with our policy credibility and help us to maintain inflation expectations
at their current levels. Being more specific with the public about our policy intentions and the
methods that we’re going to use would help to offset some of the public concern about our
ability to control inflation with such a large balance sheet.
I think another step in helping us with policy credibility and maintaining inflation
expectations anchored would be to publicly announce an explicit numerical inflation objective.
As we have been discussing, I think this is going to be a difficult time to describe our outlook for
inflation to the public. Setting an explicit numerical objective would help with that
communication. It would also force us to be clear on which measure we are targeting. So I hope
that we can return to that issue at a future meeting.
I also share the concern that has been raised by several of my colleagues about the new
language in paragraph 2. That is, stating in paragraph 2 that underlying inflation is low, but then
stating later on that we are going to see a decline. But, Mr. Chairman, given your comments that
you will address this at the press conference this afternoon, I am comfortable with the language
as it is in this new alternative. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Evans.
MR. EVANS. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B. I support the
announced $600 billion of additional asset purchases. I support maintaining the “extended
period” language. I broadly agree with the Tealbook’s policy assumption, basically, which is a
fairly extended accommodation. In making this recommendation, I continue to focus on our
dual-mandate goals for the economy. Whether you look at real GDP, nominal GDP, or
April 26–27, 2011
194 of 244
employment, we continue to be far below levels that I associate with a well-functioning economy
related to pre-recession levels. I think that we are still pretty far below that.
Because President Plosser keeps mentioning the unemployment rate in the context of the
statement, I always remember what Chairman Greenspan and Don Kohn used to say: When you
talk about unemployment, the measures are pretty variable; they move around month to month in
ways that require a lot of understanding. The labor force also moves around a lot. But
something about taking the ratio of those cleans this out, and the unemployment rate is a fairly
stable measure. It doesn’t move around very much. I think you are asking for more explaining if
you move away from that the unemployment rate; I’m not bothered by the unemployment rate at
all.
In terms of inflation, I would just like to make a side comment for the record, because
President Fisher yesterday mentioned again this language like, “Our policies have been
monetizing the debt.” And I just want to be very clear on the record that I disagree completely
with that characterization. I think that monetizing the debt is when you permanently replace debt
with money. Our discussion yesterday was all about the fact how that is not going to be a
permanent replacement, and so I just think that is a mischaracterization of our policies.
Now, for inflation. I guess I didn’t study the new language carefully enough over the
weekend, but I do have some sympathies to this idea that inflation has been higher, and we do
need to acknowledge that. One thing I have learned from going out and talking to the public is
that we need to acknowledge what they, and in fact, we are all experiencing. So I’m sympathetic
to that. But the current paragraph 2 has got this, you know—down, up, underlying inflation,
somewhat low, and then we refer to commodity prices as having pushed up “inflation.” I just
think that in talking about this—even as I heard Bill English describe this, he sort of slipped in
April 26–27, 2011
195 of 244
“headline inflation” when he mentioned that—it needs a modifier. As it stands, it has the
opportunity to rebrand what we mean when we talk about inflation if we don’t have that
modifier. Inflation is a general rise in all prices, and I don’t think we’ve got that uniformity in
price increases at the moment. And, our forecast that you are going to talk about, Mr. Chairman,
shows the central tendencies up in 2011, but in 2012, and then rising in 2013. So it is not just
that we are going to decline to rates consistent, but we’re going to go down, and then we are
going to go up, and we’re below that. I’m sympathetic to trying to get this right. I would, in
fact, be willing to talk about the entire path. And while you can do that during your press
conference, this is new territory, and the statement will be out there. I am nervous about that. I
don’t believe medium-term inflation is too high. I think we are in fact below the mandate. I
think this is a very notable change in language, and so I want to be very careful on that. Thank
you, Mr. Chairman.
MR. BULLARD. Mr. Chairman?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. I just have one question for President Evans on monetizing the debt.
Some of the options that we look at actually do talk about just leaving the balance sheet larger
and operating under a different operating system. So if we did that, would you consider that
monetizing the debt, since that would be a permanent increase in the size of the balance sheet?
MR. EVANS. Well, I appreciate that, and I think one characterization is this permanent
placement. But, overall, I think inflation is really low, and so the fact that we move to a different
operating procedure where maybe we contemplate a floor where more of it would be
permanent—I mean, this is not a partnership with the Treasury; this is not Zimbabwe or anything
like that or hyperinflation, period. And to even talk about monetizing the debt—I mean,
April 26–27, 2011
196 of 244
President Fisher has used words like “dangerous” out in the public, and I think this is not helpful.
So, yes, I would disagree with that characterization.
MR. FISHER. Is it all right if President Fisher makes a comment? I am delighted to hear
you say it was a temporary phenomenon. I am especially delighted to hear you make it clear that
this is not what we’re going to do. And I think we have 100 percent agreement at the table.
Thank you for clarifying that.
MR. TARULLO. Mr. Chairman—I don’t think we have 100 percent agreement,
President Fisher, because you have been saying publicly that we have monetized the debt. And I
don’t think that that was either the intention or the action of this Committee. So I wonder if you
agree with the other part of President Evans’s statement.
MR. FISHER. I believe we temporarily did so. I believe the numbers are there. That’s
my belief. The beauty of this Committee is we have a diversity of views. I don’t want to waste
our time on this discussion, Mr. Chairman. I think we should get back to addressing the
alternatives.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Thank you. President Lacker, you’ve got a twohander?
MR. LACKER. Yes. I heard you (President Evans) say something about inflation that
made me wonder if we understand inflation in the same way. You said it’s not inflation if it’s
not a broad and uniform increase in prices.
MR. EVANS. No. I said inflation was a general increase in all prices. I didn’t state it in
the negative way that you did.
April 26–27, 2011
197 of 244
MR. LACKER. Well, so, relative prices change at the same time inflation goes up. Does
the change in relative prices negate there being inflation? If half the prices go up at 40 percent
and the other half don’t change, do we not have 20 percent inflation?
MR. EVANS. I just think inflation is a monetary phenomenon. And whether or not we
generate a higher increase in all prices, it comes down to the policy assumption that we have
here. Our medium-term inflation forecast is for something lower than that. This doesn’t look
like inflation to me. Most of our models have a single price index. We don’t even talk about
uniformity of prices. That’s just my assessment.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B. I think the
situation calls for a steady-as-she-goes posture. I think there are scenarios that would call for a
policy adjustment earlier than I think the Committee would otherwise intend. But at this juncture
I would not signal anything that suggests a change of policy in the near term or any likelihood of
deviating from the announced LSAP2 plan. This could create unnecessary volatility in the
economy at this time when crosscurrents have produced somewhat more ambiguity than was the
case at the beginning of the year.
Turning to the statement, the characterization of the economy in alternative B is broadly
consistent with my own reading of the current circumstances and outlook. Because various TIPS
measures are up since the last FOMC meeting, I can see the case for describing longer-term
inflation expectations as “generally stable” rather than “stable.” But I am not convinced longerterm expectations are so out of line as to warrant this potentially significant change in language,
which could come close to sounding like an FOMC call to action.
April 26–27, 2011
198 of 244
I am, I have to say, somewhat sympathetic to President Evans’s suggestion of a modifier.
I think there is some potential for our treatment of inflation in this statement to still be confusing.
But, in some respects, in response to President Plosser’s recommendations, all things considered,
I think in this statement I would keep changes limited. I would introduce few or no new ways of
describing or explaining, even if I’m sympathetic with the thinking. I would put the emphasis on
the press conference and try to keep this statement as spare as possible. Thank you, Mr.
Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Yellen.
MS. YELLEN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B. I consider the
current stance of monetary policy to be warranted by economic conditions. The unemployment
rate remains well above its longer-run sustainable rate, and, as I noted in the economic go-round,
this gap mainly reflects a shortfall in aggregate demand rather than structural factors. Moreover,
longer-run inflation expectations remain reasonably stable, and I anticipate that headline inflation
will subside later this year to a level close to underlying inflation, which remains substantially
below my assessment of the mandate-consistent inflation rate. I expect the economic recovery to
continue at a gradual pace and inflation to remain subdued over the next several years. I,
therefore, support the continuation of our forward guidance that the federal funds rate is likely to
remain exceptionally low for an extended period.
And I support the completion of our $600 billion asset purchase program. I think the
effect of that program began working its way through the pipeline even before we announced it
last November, and market expectations have been conditioned all along on the assumption that
we would follow through and complete the purchases. So in response to President Bullard’s
argument that we should stop early, I would say that the failure to complete the program would
April 26–27, 2011
199 of 244
surprise markets, and it would boost longer-term rates right now. In effect, such a decision
would amount to a withdrawal of policy stimulus now, and that’s a policy shift that I don’t
consider warranted at this time. I also think it would impair the Fed’s credibility and
unnecessarily whipsaw financial markets.
My views on the appropriate path for monetary policy generally accord with the
Tealbook baseline, but I see risks to the inflation outlook that could warrant an earlier onset and
more rapid pace of policy firming. In particular, if a continued run-up in commodity prices
appeared to be sparking a wage–price spiral, then underlying inflation would begin trending
upward and a policy response would be imperative. In light of the experience of the 1970s, it’s
clear we cannot be complacent about the stability of longer-term inflation expectations, and we
must be prepared to take decisive action, if needed, to ensure that they remain firmly anchored.
On the other hand, our policy decisions and communications must also take into account the fact
that there remain material downside risks to economic activity and inflation. At our March
meeting, we generally agreed that the recovery was on a firmer footing, but the incoming
information over the past six weeks has been notably less upbeat.
I still expect the recovery to proceed at a moderate pace, and I’m glad we have resumed
the exit strategy discussions. But let’s be mindful of the possibility of déjà vu. We could still
discover over the coming months that the modest pace of GDP growth last quarter was more than
just a soft patch. Given the very high bar for launching a third round of asset purchases, this
suggests that we should be cautious about moving too quickly to initiate the process of policy
firming.
On the various language issues, I do understand the logic of including the bracketed
“[generally]” in paragraph 1, and I could certainly live with doing it. On balance, I guess I do
April 26–27, 2011
200 of 244
think it would be quite a significant change and would be perceived that way by the markets. I’d
prefer to omit it. I think longer-term inflation compensation, as measured by TIPS, is within
historical ranges, and staff analysis supports the view that the recent uptick since our last meeting
is actually due to changing liquidity and inflation risk premiums. So I could go either way on
that, but would prefer to omit it. And on the language in paragraph 2, on balance, I would
support President Evans’s suggestion that we include the modifier “headline” in front of
“inflation.”
Finally, I wanted to mention that I really appreciated Narayana’s memo about using the
Taylor (1999) rule to gauge the appropriate timing of policy liftoff. I’ve actually been a
long-time proponent of using simple rules as benchmarks for monetary policy, which is not to
say at all that we can just put policy on autopilot, blindly following the prescriptions of any
single rule. I don’t think—and the Chairman’s discussion yesterday showed this—that we can
use them to absolutely pinpoint a moment when we need to begin tightening. But I think that
giving greater prominence to such rules could facilitate our internal decisionmaking process and
would be helpful in explaining what we are doing to the public.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Duke.
MS. DUKE. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. We are near the end of a third go-round, and I
have no case to make for a change in policy. So I had planned to fly in the face of FOMC
tradition and stop speaking, but in listening to all of the discussion, I am struck by “core
inflation,” “underlying inflation,” “headline inflation,” “inflation in the medium term,” “inflation
expectations,” “inflation projections,” and even now, “unmodified inflation.” And I think it’s
really important, if we are going to build credibility, if we are going to emphasize our
commitment, that we start to talk about inflation in the same way and what we mean about it.
April 26–27, 2011
201 of 244
This debate between President Evans and President Lacker about what is inflation and
rebranding inflation says a lot about where our disagreements are. I think having disagreements
about the level of inflation is one thing, but having disagreements on what we’re talking about
when we talk about inflation actually creates a lot of confusion. And I just don’t think we can
build that credibility until we’re all speaking about the same thing. I was very pleased to hear
the Chairman say yesterday that core inflation is now yesterday’s news and that we’re actually
going to pay attention and talk about the things that real people are actually seeing and help
people understand what that means in terms of inflation. And I think that’s important in all of
our discussions.
Moving to the statement, having listened to all of that, I was originally agnostic on
having “generally” before “stable” in paragraph 1, but I think we probably ought to leave it out.
It seems like an extra modifier that I wasn’t sure there was a lot of support for.
And then, in paragraph 2, I would agree with President Kocherlakota’s suggestion that
we go back to “in a context of price stability” at the end of that sentence and leave out “a
decline,” because I got to thinking—all right, pushed up inflation to where, and a decline from
where, to a level that’s consistent—where’s that level? It created three questions in my mind,
and I think if we go back to the original language on that last sentence, it would be helpful. I
know you disagree with me, Jeff, but anyway, Mr. Chairman, those are my thoughts. I support
alternative B.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B as well, but I should
say, I support it with the understanding that paragraph 3 genuinely is communicating neutrality
with respect to the potential for adjustment of holdings in one direction or another in the future.
April 26–27, 2011
202 of 244
As people could tell from my remarks yesterday, I’m on the lower end of projections with
respect to expectations for economic growth. I continue to think that growth is going to be a
problem. Monetary policy is becoming trickier, and there’s no question but that the inflation
concerns that a lot of people have raised are something that we are going to need to be watching
carefully. But I don’t think at this juncture, given what I heard to be most people’s expectations
that these effects would be transitory, that we want to do anything like beginning to move toward
the exits, which I think ending reinvestment or changing the language would surely be.
With respect to paragraph 2, I found myself sympathetic both with Jeff’s suggestions for
changes and with Charlie’s concerns about those changes, because I think Jeff is trying to do
what Betsy suggested, regularize the use of the language, which would probably be good for us
all. But I think Charlie’s point is, given how many terms have been used at this point, it might
sow more confusion than clarity to do so.
So although I actually was comfortable with the two changes that are incorporated here,
like Betsy, I am attracted to Narayana’s compromise, which is to say, “other commodities have
pushed up inflation in recent months,” but then return to the “in a context of price stability,” and
then perhaps allow the Chairman to use a little bit of his time this afternoon to begin this process
of clarifying exactly what we mean as we talk about inflation.
And I don’t have a strong view on “generally.” I think, at the margin, I would omit it.
Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Governor Raskin.
MS. RASKIN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. I support alternative B, because the economic
recovery is too halting and uneven to warrant a substantial shift now in the stance of monetary
policy. The unemployment rate has come down, but it remains high relative to other labor
April 26–27, 2011
203 of 244
market indicators, which show a high number of people wanting full-time work but finding only
part-time work. Wage gains are minimal, and unit labor costs are not changing.
Measures of inflation have moved up, reversing a small part of their decline since 2008.
That said, the run-up in energy prices is slowing consumer spending. In addition, political unrest
in the Middle East and North Africa, and the resulting upward pressure on oil prices, have
increased the likelihood of an adverse shock to real incomes and to household confidence and, to
a lesser extent, business confidence, and thus to private domestic final demand.
If there are further increases in oil and commodity prices, and a more-than-transitory
spillover to other prices, one could imagine inflation expectations becoming unanchored. Given
these conditions and others that have been discussed, I think that the current stance of monetary
policy strikes me as appropriate. Thank you.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. President Fisher.
MR. FISHER. Well, I was thinking through what we heard from David Wilcox
yesterday, and from the Bank presidents in particular, and the dissonance that is being reported.
My notes to myself summarized them as follows.
On economic growth, like the old saw about the music of Wagner, “It’s not as bad as it
sounds,” and on inflation, like gangsta rap, it’s worse than it sounds. I think so much depends,
Mr. Chairman, on, really, what you say at this press conference and your comportment, which I
am very confident about.
In looking at the statement, I think less attention will be paid to the statement than is
normal. Almost as much attention will be paid to you as is being paid to what Kate Middleton
will wear at her wedding. [Laughter] And I am grateful for that distraction.
April 26–27, 2011
204 of 244
On the statement, I think Mr. Evans has a very good point. Here are the facts. The
headline PCE price index posed an annualized rate of increase of 4.9 percent in February. That’s
its fastest one-month rate of increase since June of 2009. That makes three straight months of
headline readings in excess of an annualized 3 percent rate. I would have no problem with
inserting the word “headline” between “pushed up” and “inflation.” I think he makes a good
point. Generally speaking, I agree with Mr. Lacker’s amendments. I’m glad that they were
reflected in alternative B. I like President Kocherlakota’s inclusion of “in the context of price
stability”—it takes some of the seesaw out. But I think the most important amendment that’s
been suggested thus far was President Plosser’s, which is to conclude the first paragraph by
saying, “longer-term inflation expectations remain within historical norms,” et cetera, et cetera. I
believe I heard him say, “indicating” whatever—“over the medium term” rather than the
“medium run.” But I would accept that language.
Let me just make a general comment about some of the tempers that seem to have flared
during this discussion. The beauty of this Committee is that it reflects diversity. There are
academics, there are very serious scholars at the table, there are actually three former bankers at
the table, and there are people with a supervision and regulation background. I don’t think we
should discourage diversities of view. I take a chapter out of Oliver Wendell Holmes: “Do not
be bullied out of your common sense.” And, moreover, that it is very important that we adhere
to both education in the obvious as well as investigation of the obscure. One of the great things
about this Committee is we have the talent and capacity to look at things in great depth, but we
also have the ability to take soundings in the field. And, as I mentioned earlier, those soundings
I wouldn’t disparage, I would use to complement and supplement what we analytically and
intellectually infer from our discussions and from our models.
April 26–27, 2011
205 of 244
Mr. Chairman, I think that, in addition to the statement and the suggestions that I have
just made, the important thing today is really this press conference. I think it would be prudent
for you to make a firm statement in your conference as to our resolve in containing inflation. I
thought your summary, as you presented it at the beginning of this discussion, was spot on. I
was tempted to embrace alternative C and to dissent at this meeting; I will not do so. I would ask
that you do, indeed, focus and reassure the markets about our intent to contain inflation and seek
price stability, because there are some doubts out there, whether they are deserved or not. And I
would conclude by saying that you might also consider noting during your press conference that
the Committee is aware of, and is monitoring, the resurgence of some financial practices that
could prove to be counterproductive. This is a concern we haven’t discussed as a group and we
don’t include in the statement, but I sense it is out there and I would like to put any notion that
we are not aware of it to an end.
So, in summary, I would support alternative B, with the amendments I mentioned,
particularly the end of the first paragraph with President Plosser’s suggestion. I would insert the
word “headline” before “pushed up inflation,” because that, indeed, is the fact. And I would
accept Narayana’s truncation of the last sentence in paragraph 2. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Thank you. I support alternative B. In terms of our
large-scale asset purchase program, we should finish the $600 billion. Stopping here would send
an inappropriately strong signal that we’re starting to remove accommodation relative to the
actual effect that the $170 billion would actually have. You would have a very strong market
reaction relative to what the actual effect would be on the balance sheet.
April 26–27, 2011
206 of 244
With respect to future large-scale asset purchase programs, I get the sense from the
Committee that the bar is quite high for a couple of reasons. One, deflation is no longer a
significant risk. Two, the economy looks better than last summer, and three, which hasn’t been
mentioned, there is more interest rate risk as the size of our balance sheet increases. So while the
language in paragraph 3 is neutral in terms of prepared to adjust up or down, I view the bar as
pretty high to further large-scale asset purchase programs, at least at this time based on what we
know about the outlook today.
In terms of the statement, there is this question about whether inflation expectations are
“stable” or whether inflation expectations are “generally stable.” You know, we debated this in
New York, and we came to the conclusion that “generally stable” was probably a more accurate
description of what we’re actually seeing. And I guess my preference is to have paragraph 1 call
it how we see it and not shade it because of worries about market reaction. That said, I do agree
that the change will be noticed, but I think that being as accurate as possible is important in terms
of maintaining our credibility. Putting in the word “generally” could actually be productive in
the sense that it might show a greater concern about inflation expectations, which might keep
inflation expectations better anchored. It could prove beneficial to us rather than problematic,
and I do favor putting in “generally.”
In terms of President Plosser’s suggestion of historical norms, I guess my problem there
is: What time period does “historical norm” apply to? Does it include the 1965–82 period? And
how do we feel about it being within historical norms? There’s no view of whether the idea of
historical norms is acceptable or not, so I think it’s a little vague in terms of how people would
interpret it.
April 26–27, 2011
207 of 244
In terms of paragraph 2, I favor keeping the last sentence unchanged, “in the context of
price stability,” because it avoids this low-high-low pattern of that paragraph in introducing so
many different concepts. I think it keeps the paragraph simpler, and, to President Lockhart’s
point, maintains our practice of only making changes when we think the changes are actually
necessary and a distinct improvement. If people don’t want to do that, I could accept it. I could
certainly accept inserting the word “headline” or “overall” as the modifier to the inflation rate in
that paragraph. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you very much. Let me try to start by saying
something about policy, then turn to general issues of communication, and then we’ll try to
wordsmith the statement a little bit.
We are in good time here, so—not that I’m going to tempt everybody to turn into
E. B. White [laughter], but anyway.
The big policy action that’s being proposed under alternative B is to announce the end of
what to my distaste, but nevertheless unavoidably, is now known as QE2. There have been some
postmortems of this already in the media. My own view—and I appreciated President Bullard’s
comments on this yesterday—is that the program was reasonably successful. It was undertaken
at a time when we were concerned about the sustainability of the recovery. It was not clear that
growth was sufficient to reduce unemployment, and deflation risk, although not high,
nevertheless was building as core measures fell below 1 percent, and at that point, of course,
headline and core were pretty close. What our policy did was clearly demonstrate that we can
affect financial conditions even though the zero lower bound is binding; that’s intellectually a
historically important development to show to be the case. I think there’s little doubt of that
even among the skeptics. In addition, the forecasts and outlooks between August and January
April 26–27, 2011
208 of 244
generally improved, and in particular, of course, deflation risk is largely gone and the recovery
seems self-sustaining. That has been slowed a bit lately by the oil price increases. As I argued
yesterday, I don’t think that’s really due to QE2, although some others might disagree, but again,
I think that it’s been generally a successful exercise.
Some of the commentary that claims otherwise, I think, does so only because it seems to
assume that we somehow claimed that this was going to be a panacea, that it was going to solve
all of our deep economic problems. We never made any such claim. At one point we published
work that said it would cause 700,000 additional jobs, or about 30,000 a month, which is hardly
a game changer, but certainly something that, at least at the time, most of us thought was worth
doing. I’m sure there’s some rationalization here, but in my own view, it was the right thing to
do, and it was a very important experiment. I would like to complete it both because I think it is
needed substantively and because I don’t like the signal that not completing it would send.
Going forward, as some have noted, further actions of this type would have to meet a
very high bar. In particular, I think we’d need to be looking again at real concerns about the
sustainability of the recovery and about deflation; slow recovery, for example, is not going to be
sufficient. Of course, if further stimulus is needed, we could reconsider alternative measures,
such as changes in language and so on, but let’s leave that for the future. My modal forecast at
this point is that we will go on hold for a short period, at least, to see what’s happening, and if
things go as I hope they will and as we all hope they will, we can begin a process of gradual exit
through many of the steps that were outlined in the various discussions yesterday. But we’ll see,
of course, as always. Policies always stay contingent and provisional.
I’ll just say one word about President Bullard’s useful interjection about Ss rules.
There’s always some degree of that in Committee discussions. In particular, another example is
April 26–27, 2011
209 of 244
the fact that we always move in 25 basis point increments; we don’t move in 10 basis point
increments. In my view, part of the reason why that doesn’t constrain our ability to respond
continuously is because our language and our signals do allow for some variation in effective
tightness by changing expectations in markets. But I agree that we certainly want the markets to
respond in a way that is consistent with the incoming news flow.
Let me just say a word about communication. There have been a number of really good
issues raised. First, in terms of general framework, I think we basically have a framework. I
think a lot of it was expressed in the document that President Plosser and his group put together
in their discussion of numerical inflation objectives. It’s pretty much a modern centrist
macroeconomic framework. But it’s also true that in terms of our language, between
“underlying” and “overlying” and “temporary” and “permanent” and everything else, that we are
getting so deep into the code words that we need Alan Turing and the Enigma machine to figure
some of it out. [Laughter]
Now, I’m very flattered about all the comments you made about how my press
conference in 30 minutes is going to clarify all these matters [laughter] and straighten everybody
out, and I will do my very best, I promise. I do think that the press conference over time, in
conjunction with the evolution of our language, will be an important adjunct and will allow us to
clarify and be more explicit about the framework, about the role of the numerical objective,
about the role of short term versus long term, about inflation forecasts, and the like. But I think
that we do need—and I charge Bill English and others with this—as we move even toward the
next statement, to step back a little bit and try to clarify our framework, make it a little sharper so
that we can link it up to the language in a more transparent way. Again, a number of other useful
suggestions about communications were raised today and yesterday. I think that taking core
April 26–27, 2011
210 of 244
inflation out of the projections is something we should discuss. It would send a very strong
signal, and it’s not evident what role it’s playing at this point if we have our explicit forecasts.
As I said yesterday in response to President Bullard, future headline inflation is our
objective, and I don’t think anyone doubts that. I think many of the critics either don’t
understand or don’t want to understand what the role of core inflation is: It’s just simply an
intermediate indicator or a forecasting device. At the same time, as we discussed the projections,
additional good suggestions were made; one was that if we can do it in a way that would not be
confusing, given the many dimensions of the balance sheet, maybe we could begin to provide
some information on our balance sheet expectations or on our policy rate expectations. This is
not something I necessarily advocate doing in the next six weeks because it’s complex and
there’s not a whole lot of international experience to draw on, but I think we should be thinking
about that.
I have one other suggestion to make, and I’ve thought about this for almost 15 minutes
now. [Laughter] President Kocherlakota made a very good point, which is that because the
amount of effective stimulus does depend on expectations about how the balance sheet is going
to evolve, and given the novelty of this particular tool, it would be very useful if we could
provide more information to the public about how that’s going to happen. We certainly have had
some very good discussions. I think there are some areas where a majority of the Committee is
in one place or another, but maybe we could begin a process of trying to put together a white
paper or something like one that we would approve and release, that would say whatever it is we
can agree on, and would try to provide at least some guidance to the public about how this
process is going to unfold. Now, as I said, I’ve thought about this for 15 minutes, and I’m sure
the staff are all canceling their vacations as I speak [laughter], but it would be good, I think, if we
April 26–27, 2011
211 of 244
could try to come up with something as a group. Of course, the trouble with these open
discussions is that while they’re extremely informative, at some point, obviously, we’re going to
have to make choices, and it would be good if we could figure out exactly what it is we agree on,
where we don’t agree, and how are we going to decide. So that might be one way forward. At a
minimum, we should try to go back and summarize what was learned in the discussion
yesterday—in the Tealbook, in the minutes, and elsewhere—to try to lay out those points. I
think we have a lot of work to do in strengthening our framework and our communication. Press
conferences are an opportunity, but they are not by themselves going to be sufficient, so I hear
that loud and clear. Particularly at this critical stage, I think we need to keep thinking about that.
All right. Now, as usual, I’m trying to keep track of some of the various issues. I think
there was broad support for alternative B for various reasons. If I’m not mistaken, I think there
are really only two questions that we need to decide. The first has to do with the characterization
of inflation expectations in the last sentence of alternative B, paragraph 1, whether or not they
remain “generally” stable. I think I’ve heard three possibilities here. One is just to stay where
we are and say that it remains stable. I personally have a mild preference for that because I don’t
think there’s much evidence of any kind of significant change in inflation expectations. Now,
Bill will argue that if you add up enough small changes, you get a significant change, so I’m
basically open to whatever the Committee wants to do. Again, I have a slight preference not to
change the language because it will create knock-on effects in the “extended period” language,
and so on. But if we decide to change it, two suggestions have been made. One is to add the
word “generally,” and the other, from President Plosser, was to say something like, “inflation
expectations have remained,” and I would say, “within recent normal ranges.” President Plosser,
I would take that part. I would discourage the second part, although I think it’s very useful,
April 26–27, 2011
212 of 244
about “medium term” because we then have the same issue in the second paragraph, and we
would have to restructure the whole thing. I’d like to propose that we just systematically try to
create a vocabulary that encompasses all of the various concepts that we have for inflation, but I
don’t want to do that on the fly. So question number one is how to characterize inflation
expectations in paragraph 1.
Question number two has to do with the changes in paragraph 2. There are two changes
here. The first one says, “Increases in the prices of energy and other commodities have pushed
up inflation in recent months.” Frankly, I think if we just have that change, and if we decide to
eliminate the second one just for the moment—again, I’m open to discussion—but because our
previous statement said, “are currently putting upward pressure on inflation,” unmodified, I’m
not quite sure why a change is needed. Once you start talking about the decline in inflation, et
cetera, then it’s becoming more complicated. One option, which I think I heard at least a
plurality favor, was just to keep the first and drop the second, returning to the old language in the
last sentence. The other alternative I guess I would propose would be to accept both changes and
maybe to put in “headline inflation” in both places.
MR. EVANS. I agree with your characterization, Mr. Chairman. It’s really the last part,
where it mentions a decline in inflation to rates consistent with the Federal Reserve’s mandate,
that made me think differently about it. If you drop that one along the lines of President
Kocherlakota, I do not have a problem with the “pushed up inflation in recent months.” That’s
just fine.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I don’t want to complicate it further, but you could say,
“gradual return to higher levels of resource utilization and to levels of inflation consistent with
April 26–27, 2011
213 of 244
the Federal Reserve’s mandate,” without getting into ups and downs. That would be another
way to do it.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. I think it’s easier just to keep it the way it is.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. I withdraw that then. All right. So those are two
questions. I’m going to take a straw vote on both of these in just a minute, but does anyone want
to make a further comment—let’s start with the first one, on inflation expectations?
MR. PLOSSER. Mr. Chairman? Can I just make an observation?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. President Plosser.
MR. PLOSSER. It’s about two pieces of the language that are tied together. One is the
issue of what we mean by underlying inflation. That was what I was trying to address. And I
understand what you’re saying. We use it several times, so we’ve got to figure out a way
around, but I think we need to work our way out of that language. And the second is the context
of price stability. I’ve never quite understood exactly what that meant, and I think part of
President Lacker’s effort was to get away from that. I would be happy if we made a commitment
for the staff, as we move through the next set of languages, to try to clean up both of those
concepts in a way that we’re consistent through this, which I think was what your earlier
suggestion was. I think that’s going to be important going forward for us.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Well, again, certainly the staff, Bill and others, hear
that. Point taken. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. If I could just add to that. Betsy is right and you’re right, I think, that
we need to take a systematic look at the language that we use to communicate about inflation. I
don’t think we’re far apart at all on the facts. I think we all understand it. It’s choosing the
language to communicate what there is a consensus about.
April 26–27, 2011
214 of 244
I think, broad brush: The recovery is continuing, we know inflation is high, and it’s
going to come down. Those are the three things we want to communicate with the statement,
and to go back to the context of price stability is to rely on people comparing context of price
stability and high current inflation and realizing, oh, they’re saying it’s going to come down. I
mean, to me, it’s an oblique and, to my mind, unnecessarily indirect way of stating, “We expect
inflation to come down.” So I just wanted to get that point in.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. I think that’s a perfectly viable option, as long as we put in
“headline.”
MR. LACKER. Yes, I’m not against putting in “headline.” I mean, I think over time
we’re going to want to drop that. We could use “overall” just as well.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Yes, “overall” would actually be even better, I think. Vice
Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Earlier in that paragraph we do say that we expect these
effects to be transitory, so we are setting up the idea of why we think that we’re going back to
price stability. If we hadn’t mentioned the transitory nature, I would be more in agreement with
you, but we do mention it. So that, I think, sets up what follows.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Yes, that’s true. President Kocherlakota.
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. I’ll say a couple things. First, I think references to “headline”
should be avoided. I think in the systematic overview of language that will take place in the next
six weeks we will regret using that language. The use of the term price stability is to connote
two things at once, and perhaps it’s too oblique to do that. One is that inflation will decline from
its current high levels, but it’s also to say that underlying inflation will return from its current
low levels to 2 percent.
April 26–27, 2011
215 of 244
MR. LACKER. What’s “underlying inflation,” in this context?
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. I think of “underlying inflation” as being our best possible
forecast—
MR. LACKER. Forecast is going to return to—?
MR. KOCHERLAKOTA. Our actual forecast is for inflation to do this—to go up, and to
come down below, and then to reach target from below. I think it’s a very subtle and artistic
forecast. [Laughter]
MR. LACKER. It doesn’t say what our forecast is going to do, what we expect our
forecast to do, which is different than what we forecast inflation to do.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. All right. Okay. President Lacker, would you be okay for
this meeting to restore the ambiguity of “in a context of price stability?”
MR. LACKER. Yes.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you. That’s with the understanding that this is not a
satisfactory situation. I think President Kocherlakota’s point about starting to throw in
“headline,” adding yet another term, is going to be an issue. So I’m perfectly okay with “pushed
up inflation in recent months” because I think that’s accurate, if that’s okay with everybody.
All right. Let’s restore the last sentence of alternative B, paragraph 2, and keep the
change “have pushed up inflation,” not “headline inflation”—“have pushed up inflation in recent
months.”
So then our remaining question is about inflation expectations. Let me just see first if
there’s a plurality to leave it where it is, and if there isn’t—let’s vote the following way. Change
or no change, and then if there’s a change, we’ll figure out which change is better. President
Plosser?
April 26–27, 2011
216 of 244
MR. PLOSSER. Can I just say one thought that just occurred to me?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Yes.
MR. PLOSSER. Rather than “recent historical norms,” you could say, “inflation
expectations remain at acceptable levels.” That doesn’t address the volatility of them
necessarily. But maybe that connotes too much.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. That’s a little anxiety producing.
MR. PLOSSER. Yes, I withdraw that. I’m sorry.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. All right. In the interest of coffee, I’m now going to ask
how many people would like to just leave the characterization of inflation expectations as
“remained stable,” and how many would like to consider an alternative. How many would like
to say “remained stable”? [Show of hands]
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Well, ten is a majority, so we’ll just keep that
language. Any other comments or questions? [No response]
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. Again, I thank you for both your input and your
willingness to work flexibly with the Committee. We’re ready for a vote. Debbie.
MS. DANKER. This is on alternative B, the statement in the handout, as well as the
directive. In the handout, it is as written in the handout. The “generally” is struck, and the final
sentence of paragraph 2 reads, “The Committee anticipates a gradual return to higher levels of
resource utilization in a context of price stability.” Chairman Bernanke.
MR. ENGLISH. Do you want “continues to” to go back in there so that the sentence is
staying the same?
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Shouldn’t we make the last sentence identical to the
previous statement?
April 26–27, 2011
217 of 244
MR. ENGLISH. That is what I was suggesting.
MS. DANKER. Keep “continues to.” Okay. All right. “Continues to” is now in there.
Chairman Bernanke
Vice Chairman Dudley
Governor Duke
President Evans
President Fisher
President Kocherlakota
President Plosser
Governor Raskin
Governor Tarullo
Governor Yellen
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Thank you very much. We are very efficient. The next
meeting is June 21 and 22. As you know, the press conference is at 2:15 p.m. If anyone is here
and wants to see it, there will be a screening available in the Special Library across the hall.
In a moment I will call the end of the meeting and then have coffee, and for those who
would stay, Linda Robertson will present a congressional update—optional. And now we are
still having lunch, I guess?
MS. DANKER. I think they’re going to bring it at 11:30.
CHAIRMAN BERNANKE. Okay. At 11:30, for those who would like to have lunch;
don’t ever tell me that there’s no such thing as a free lunch. All right. The meeting is adjourned.
Coffee for 20 minutes, and then those who want to hear an update on congressional
developments, please come back to the table.
END OF MEETING
Cite this document
APA
Federal Reserve (2011, April 26). FOMC Meeting Transcript. Fomc Transcripts, Federal Reserve. https://whenthefedspeaks.com/doc/fomc_transcript_20110427
BibTeX
@misc{wtfs_fomc_transcript_20110427,
author = {Federal Reserve},
title = {FOMC Meeting Transcript},
year = {2011},
month = {Apr},
howpublished = {Fomc Transcripts, Federal Reserve},
url = {https://whenthefedspeaks.com/doc/fomc_transcript_20110427},
note = {Retrieved via When the Fed Speaks corpus}
}